Me 1

Total No. of Questions : 8] [Total No. of Pages : 2

[3765] - 108M.E. (E & TC) (Microwave)

MULTIPLE ACCESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS(Revised Course 2004) (504206)

Time : 3 Hours] [Max. Marks : 100

Instructions to the candidates:

1) Answer any three questions from each section.

2) Answers to the two sections should be written in separate books.

3) Neat diagrams must be drawn wherever necessary.

4) Figures to the right indicate full marks.

5) Use of non-programmable electronic calculators is allowed.

6) Assume suitable data, if necessary.

P1653

SECTION - I

Q1) a) What are the Kepler’s Laws of orbital motion? and Explain. [8]b) State and explain the different types of satellite orbits. [8]

Q2) a) Explain the different types of Hand-off mechanisms. [8]b) What are the major subsystems required on the space craft? Explain the

telemetry, Tracking and Command (TT & C) in detail. [8]

Q3) a) A satellite at a distance of 60,000 km from a pilot on the earth’s surfaceradiates a power of 3 W from an antenna with a gain of 18dB in thedirection of the observer. Find the flux density at the receiving point, andthe power received by antenna with effective area of 10m2. The satelliteoperates at a frequency of 10GHz. The receiving antenna has a gain of50dB. Find the received power. [10]

b) Suppose we have a 4 GHz receiver with following gains and noisetemperature a Tin = 50oK, TRF = 50oK, Tm = 500oK, TIF = 1000oK,GRF = 23dB, Gm = 0 dB, GIF = 30 dB, calculate the system temperature.

[6]

Q4) Write short notes on : [18]a) Earth station design.

b) ALOHA channel.

c) Noise Temperature.

d) CDMA systems.

P.T.O.

SECTION - II

Q5) Explain the significance and function of the following GSM subsystems withrelevant block diagrams [16]

a) Mobile station (MS).

b) Base station sub system (BSS).

c) Operation sub system (OSS).

d) Network and switching sub system (NSS).

Q6) Explain the following parameters with reference to mobile communicationsystems : [16]

a) Co channel interference.

b) Frequency reuse.

c) Blocking probability.

d) Cell splitting.

e) Adjacent Channel interference.

Q7) a) Explain with block diagram and suitable code, the operation of a CEDMAsystem. [8]

b) Draw the geometry of Cassegrain antenna and explain its operation.Explain the feeding system for large Cassegrain antennas. [8]

Q8) Write short notes (any three) : [18]

a) Cell Design.

b) Cordless Telephone Systems.

c) ARQ Techniques.

d) Vocoders.

[3765] - 108 -2-


[3765] - 140M.E. (Electronics) (Computer)

EMBEDDED SYSTEM AND SOFTWARE(2002 Revised Course)


Instructions to the candidates:1) Figures to the right indicate full marks.2) Assume suitable data if required.3) Use of scientific calculator is allowed.4) Answer any three questions from each section.5) Answers to the two sections must be written in separate answer books.

P1657

SECTION - I

Q1) a) Explain internal RAM and internal ROM of 8051. [8]

b) Assuming crystal frequency to be 12 MHz, find out the count to be loadedin timer 1 mode 2 to generate a square wave of 100 Hz for 8051. [10]

Q2) a) Explain addressing modes in 8051 with example for each mode. [8]

b) Explain internal interrupts for 8051. [8]

Q3) a) Explain the required features for operating system to function as a realtime system. [8]

b) Explain the hardware and software requirements of an embedded system.[8]

Q4) a) Draw and explain architecture of ARM processor. [8]

b) Explain the function of different registers in ARM processor. [8]

SECTION - II

Q5) a) Describe the features of AVR microcontroller. Draw and explain registerstructure in it. [10]

b) Draw and explain the memory structure in AVR microcontroller andcompare it with 8051 microcontroller. [8]

P.T.O.

Q6) a) Explain i2C bus protocol. [8]

b) Explain MODBUS. [8]

Q7) a) Compare features of FPGA and CPLD. [8]

b) Explain how exception handling is done in ARM processor. [8]

Q8) a) Explain IEEE 802.11 protocol for wireless communication. [8]

b) What is JTAG? Explain hardware design on FPGA using Xilinx. [8]

[3765] - 140 -2-


[3765] - 151M.E. (Electrical - Power Systems & Control Systems)

MICROCONTROLLER & ITS APPLICATIONS IN CONTROLSYSTEM

(2002 Course) (503107)Time : 3 Hours] [Max. Marks : 100


1) Answer any two questions from each section.



P1658

SECTION - I

Q1) a) Compare between [15]i) 8085 microprocessor and 8051 microcontroller.

ii) CISC and RISC processors.

iii) Har Vard and Von-Neumann Architecture.

b) Draw the pin diagram and explain the features of 8051 microcontrollerin brief. [5]

c) Explain, why is a register different from a memory location? [5]

Q2) a) Discuss the functions of 8051 Boolean processor. [5]b) Enlist the salient features of 8051 microcontroller. [5]c) Explain the SFR’s associated with the following functions. [10]d) Assuming the use of Bank O, find at what RAM location each of the

following lines stored the data [5]i) MOV R4, # 32H

ii) MOV R0, # 12H

iii) MOV R7, # 3FH

iv) MOV R5, # 55H

v) MOV R3, # 9FH.

Q3) a) Enlist all the instruction that use stack memory. [5]b) What is the difference between the following operation? [5]

MOV P1, # 1111 0000B and ORL, # 1111 0000B

when would both of these instructions results in the same port 1 outputs?

P.T.O.

c) Write a programme to produce a delay of 2 ms using Timer 1 in mode 1(11.0592 MHz). [5]

d) Write a program to add the following data and store result in RAM location30 H. [5]

ORG 2000 H

Data DB - 06, 09, 02, 05, 07

e) Write a program to toggle all the bits of port 1 by sending to it the values55H and AA continuously. Put a time delay in between each issuing ofdata to port 1. [5]

SECTION - II

Q4) a) Explain the following terms [15]i) Simulator.

ii) Emulator.

iii) Assemblers.

iv) Programmers.

v) Cross Assemblers.

b) Explain the steps of serial interfacing of 8051 with PC and how uploadingand downloading of program is done? [10]

Q5) a) Draw Block diagram and flow chart & write program to control steppermotor. [13]

b) Draw Block diagram and flow chart & write program to control speed ofDC motor. [12]

Q6) a) Explain the added features of 8096 over 8051. [5]b) What are salient features of MCS-96 family of microcontroller 2 given

an application of PWM features of this microcontroller. [10]c) Write a short note on internal memory structure in 8096 family. [10]

[3765] - 151 -2-


[3765] - 163M.E. (Electrical) (Power System)POWER SYSTEM PROTECTION

(2002 Course)Time : 3 Hours] [Max. Marks : 100






5) Use of logarithmic tables, slide rule, Mollier charts, electronic pocketcalculator and steam tables is allowed.


P1662

SECTION - I

Q1) a) Explain following relay schemes [9]i) Electromagnetic relays.

ii) Static relays.

iii) Digital relays.

Compare their advantages and disadvantages.

b) What is meant by fault analysis? What is its importance? [8]c) Explain static overcurrent relay. [8]

Q2) a) Draw a neat vector diagram of current transformer. Explain ratio & phaseangle errors. What are the limits of these errors? [9]

b) Write a note on Modelling & standards of CTs and PTs. [8]c) With a diagram explain working of CVT. [8]

Q3) a) Explain PILOT relaying protection scheme. [9]b) Derive from fundamentals the generalised expression for radius of circle

& co-ordinates of the centre of a dual input phase comparator. [10]c) Explain the effect of overreach of a relay. [6]

P.T.O.

SECTION - II

Q4) a) Explain THREE STEPPED Distance protection scheme of Transmissionline. [10]

b) Explain effect of power swing on protection of transmission line. [7]c) Explain a protective scheme based on travelling waves for protection of

transmission lines. [8]

Q5) a) Explain digital protection scheme of synchronous generator based onsecond harmonic current injection in rotor circuit. [12]

b) Explain Modern bus bar protection scheme. [13]

Q6) Write notes on : [25]

a) Buchholz Relay.

b) Harmonic restrained differential relay.

c) Static quadrilateral distance relay.

d) High impedance differential scheme for bus bar protection.

e) Effect of magnetising inrush current in transformer.

[3765] - 163 -2-


[3765] - 177M.E. (Production)

HARD AND SOFT AUTOMATION(Revised Course 2002)




2) Answers to the two sections should be written in separate answer books.





7) Your answer will be valued as a whole.

P1667

SECTION - I

Q1) a) Draw and explain possible layouts of the segmented in-line configurationof an automated production line. [8]

b) How do you differentiate Dedicated Manufacturing verses FlexibleManufacturing? [8]

Q2) a) Explain with your own example different steps involved PFA - ProductFlow Analysis. [8]

b) Explain the basic terminology for analysis of transfer line with no internalstorage. [8]

Q3) a) Describe a suitable transverse motion of a table by using limit switchesoperated by solenoids. [8]

b) Explain in brief “in travel control system” used in industrial automation.[8]

Q4) a) What do you mean by Adaptive Control and how it can be applied to amachine tool? [8]

b) Explain briefly machine vision system used in robotics. [8]

P.T.O.

Q5) Write short notes on (Any Three) : [18]a) CRAFT.

b) Geneva Mechanism.

c) LVDT.

d) Transfer Line Monitoring System - TLMS.e) Hard and Soft Automation.

SECTION - II

Q6) a) Explain Routh Hurwitz Criterion with its advantages and limitations.[8]b) With the help of block diagram explain the generalized feed back control

system in brief. [8]

Q7) a) Explain ladder logic diagrams for your own application sequence withsymbols. [8]

b) Explain what are the different guidance technologies used in AGVs. [8]

Q8) a) What are Petri-Nets? Explain uses of Petri-Nets. [8]b) Draw a analytical hierarchical architecture for a cellular manufacturing

system. Explain essential characteristics of the various items of a cellularmanufacturing system. [8]

Q9) a) Briefly differentiate between FMS, Agile and World Class Manufacturing.[8]

b) Explain what are the different types of robot grippers with theirapplications. [8]

Q10)Write short notes on (Any Three) : [18]a) Motor type relay.

b) Types of AGVs.

c) CCD Camera.

d) CTMC - Continuous Markov Chain Model.

e) On Line Inspection.

[3765] - 177 -2-


[3765] - 18M.E. (Civil - Hydraulic)

COMPUTATIONAL METHODS IN HYDRAULIC ENGINEERING(2002 Old Course) (501301)


Instructions to the candidates:1) Answer any three questions from each section.2) Answer any three questions from Section I and three questions from Section II.3) Answers to the two sections should be written in separate books.4) Neat diagrams must be drawn wherever necessary.5) Figures to the right indicate full marks.6) Your answers will be valued as a whole.7) Use of electronic pocket calculator is allowed.8) Assume suitable data, if necessary.

P1637

SECTION - I

Q1) a) Write about Laplace Equation in detail which is used for the variousComputational Methods. From the view point of Finite Difference Methoddiscuss about the applicability of FDM in Computational Methods forFluid Flow. [9]

b) What do you mean by stagnation points? Can there be more than onestagnation points? Discuss the flow around a cylinder with allmathematical details. [9]

Q2) a) Write in detail about the Initial Boundary Value Problems along withexamples. [8]

b) What is the basis of Relaxation Method? When a fluid passage becomesgradually narrow then the streamlines come closer. Why does it happen?What is the equation of stream line? Why stream line is an imaginaryline? Do you think that Method of Relaxation is the most convenientmethod for drawing the flow net for any Hydraulic Structure? Show theApplication of Relaxation Method in a case; when flow is taking placewithin a totally penetrating confined well? [8]

Q3) a) What do you mean by Boundary value problem? State two examples. [8]b) Derive Kutta-Jukowski Equation for the flow past a cylinder and prove

that Γ =ρ VL. [8]

P.T.O.

Q4) a) Write in detail about Markov Chain. [8]b) What is the role of Simpson’s rule in Numerical Integration? What are

the significance of Simpson’s rule in Hydraulics? [8]

SECTION - II

Q5) a) Write in detail about Schwartz-Christoffel Transformation. Give oneexample along with all the mathematical equations. [9]

b) What do you mean by Regression? What are their applications in thesubject of Computation Methods in Hydraulic Engineering? State twoexamples along with their mathematical significances. [9]

Q6) a) What is the basis of FDM? How do you apply to a steady state system offluid flow. Can FDM be applied for unsteady flow system? [8]

b) Write in detail about Chi Square Test. How do you correlate NullHypothesis and Chi Square test? [8]

Q7) a) Prove the Cauchy - Reimann Equation and show that the first order partialderivatives of the velocity potential function w.r.t. ‘x’ and ‘y’ give thecomponents of velocities in ‘x’ and ‘y’ direction with negative sign. [8]

b) The Velocity potential is expressed as φ = 6xy . Find the component ofvelocities in ‘x’ and ‘y’ direction and find the stream function ‘ψ ’. [8]

Q8) Write Short Notes (Any Four): [16]a) Boundary Value Problem.b) Poisson’s Equation.c) Separation due to sudden enlargement.d) Oseen’s Correction.e) Correction factor ‘λ ’ for relaxation method, when one or more than one

arm of a square grid is incomplete.f) Reliability of Finite Difference Method.

[3765] - 18 -2-


[3765] - 189M.E. (Computer)

EMBEDDED SYSTEM DESIGN(2002 Course) (Elective - II)


Instructions to the candidates:1) Answer any three questions from each section.2) Answers to the two sections should be written in separate answer books.3) Neat diagrams must be drawn wherever necessary.4) Figures to the right indicate full marks.5) Assume suitable data, if necessary.

P1671

SECTION - I

Q1) a) What are the different characteristics of embedded systems? Explain.[8]

b) What are the different design metrics applicable to embedded systems?[10]

Q2) a) What are the advantages of using ASIC & ASSP in embedded systems?Explain. [6]

b) Define interrupt latency period. What is minimum and maximum interruptlatency period for ARM7 processor? [6]

c) What is IDE for Embedded systems? [4]

Q3) a) It is required to design a real time robot control system. For this applicationselect the appropriate processor / microcontroller based on : [8]

i) Instruction cycle time.

ii) Bus width.

iii) Number of interrupts.

iv) On-chip RAM, ROM/Flash memory.

b) How contact-less smart card gets power up? Give details. [8]

Q4) a) Explain the following RAM types : SDRAM, EDO RAM and DDR.[9]

b) Explain the data transfer mechanism in I2C protocol with the help ofneat timing diagram. [7]

P.T.O.

SECTION - II

Q5) a) Name and explain topology used to connect devices to host in USBprotocol. Also state the application areas of USB. [8]

b) List and explain salient features of CAN protocol. Give details about itsarea of applications. [10]

Q6) a) Compare of ISA and EISA buses based on the features such as data rate,data size, connector size, applications. [6]

b) Explain the bus arbitration in CAN protocol. [6]

c) What are the important characteristics of I2C protocol? [4]

Q7) a) Explain the architecture of CPLD. How it can be programmed? What areits limitations? [10]

b) Compare desktop OS and embedded OS. [6]

Q8) a) Define RTOS. [4]

b) Differentiate between soft RTOS and hard RTOS. Also give two examplesfor each type. [8]

c) What are the different IPCs implemented in VxWorks? [4]

[3765] - 189 -2-


[3765] - 2M.E. (Civil) (C.M.)

CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENTS & MATERIAL MANAGEMENT(2002 Course)


Instructions to the candidates:1) Solve any three questions from each section.2) Figures to the right indicate full marks.3) Draw neat diagrams wherever required.4) Answers to the two sections should be written in separate answer books.

P1633

SECTION - I

Q1) Draw a detailed sketch of a “Full face tunnel boring machine” used for tunnelingin rock, showing various parts and explain basic operations involved inadvancement of the ‘Tunnel boring machine’. [16]

Q2) Draw a neat labeled sketches and explain the function of following ‘PileHammers’ in construction of Displacement piles. [16]a) Single acting Diesel hammer.

b) Pneumatic Hammers.

c) Vibro Hammers.

Q3) a) Explain the function and the type of each Cutter head used in tunneling,in any two of the following strata’s. [8]i) Soft rock.

ii) Medium hard rock.

iii) Hard rock.

b) Draw a neat sketch of “Part face Tunneling Machine” and give theadvantages Compared with ‘Full face Tunnel Boring Machine’. [8]

Q4) a) Explain in details following blasting techniques used in “Drill & BlastMethod” [8]i) Burn Cut Method.

ii) Pyramid Cut Method.

b) Draw a neat sketch of a “Tunnel Boring Machine” and explain Sequenceof operations involved in one “Drill Cycle” of T.B.M. [10]

P.T.O.

SECTION - II

Q5) Write short notes on any four of the following : [16]

a) Drag-line Excavator.

b) Segmental Lining in Tunnels.

c) Tractor Dozer.

d) Equipment Transporters.

e) Segmental Lining in Tunnels.

Q6) a) In a tunneling job, which are the factors, you will consider in “SelectionProcess” for deciding the method of tunneling. [8]

b) Draw a neat labeled sketch of a “Single acting Diesel hammer” and explainits function in construction of Displacement piles. [8]

Q7) a) Explain with a labeled sketch function of “Ready Mix Concrete Plant”.[9]

b) Expain with a sketch different Stages of Erection of an “R.M.C. Plant”.[9]

Q8) Explain in details advantages and precautions you will take in using concretepumps in the construction of High Rise Buildings. [16]

[3765] - 2 -2-


[3765] - 200M.E. (Computer)

COMPUTER VISION(Revised Course 2002) (Theory)



1) Answer any 3 questions from each section.




5) Your answers will be valued as a whole.


P1869

SECTION - I

Q1) a) Explain four levels of image data representation. [8]

b) Which are important traditional data structures? Explain two hierarchicaldata structures. [8]

Q2) a) Explain brightness interpolation. [8]

b) Write histogram equalization algorithm. [8]

Q3) a) Explain the concept of border detection using border locationtransformation. [8]

b) Explain region merging via boundary melting. [8]

Q4) Write short notes on : [18]

a) Median Filtering.

b) Edge relaxation.

c) Hough transform.

P.T.O.

SECTION - II

Q5) a) Explain the concept of 4-neighbourhood region identification. [8]

b) Define following shape descriptors. [8]

i) Eccentricity.

ii) Compactness.

iii) Rectangularity.

iv) Direction.

Q6) a) Explain main steps of fuzzy system design. [8]

b) Explain Mac. Queen K-means clustering. [8]

Q7) a) Explain the concepts of active and purposive vision. [8]

b) Give an overview of single camera calibration. [8]

Q8) Write short notes on [18]

a) Calibration of one camera from known scene.

b) Chain codes.

c) Unsupervised learning.

[3765] - 200 -2-


[3765] - 203M.E. (Petroleum Engineering)

NUMERICAL METHODS AND SIMULATION IN PETROLEUMENGINEERING.

(2002 Revised Course)Time : 3 Hours] [Max. Marks : 100

Instructions to the candidates:1) Answers to the two sections must be written in separate answer books.2) Answer two questions from each section.3) Figures to the right indicate full marks.4) Neat diagrams should be drawn wherever necessary.5) Use of a non-programmable calculator is allowed.6) Assume suitable data if necessary and clearly state it.

P1679

SECTION - I

Q1) For the following system of equations, find x, y, z using SOR, LUdecomposition,and Gauss Seidel method. w = 1.1.

x + y + z = 8

2x + 3y + z = 17

x – y + z = 4 [25]

Q2) a) Solve the following system of equations by Newton Raphson method

x2y + cos(xy) = 54

sinh(x2y) + xy = cosy

b) Find the roots of the equation by Graeffe method :

x3 + 3x2 + 5x – 4 = 0 [25]

Q3) Solve y′ = x2y + cos(xy) + 4, y(1) = 2, using Euler, RK-4 and Adam Moultonpredictor corrector method. [25]

SECTION - II

Q4) Given a 1D reservoir. Find the pressures in the interior of the reservoir, if thepressures are at 50 psi for one well and 3000 psi at the other well, both at eachboundary. Length of the reservoir are 400 ft. Assume delx = 100 ft. Solve byexplicit, Cranknicolson and implicit method. Only set up the matrix. [25]

P.T.O.

Q5) Find the finite difference approximations for the following : [25]a) First derivative forward of order del x squared.

b) Third derivative backward of order del x squared.

c) Second derivative central of order del x fourth.

Q6) Write a detailed Essay on output for Reservoir Simulation. [25]

[3765] - 203 -2-


[3765] - 221M.E. (Instrumentation, Process & Biomedical)

ADVANCED MATHEMATICS(506101) (Revised Course 2002) (Theory)







5) Use of electronic pocket calculator is allowed.


P1681

SECTION - I

Q1) a) With usual notation, prove that (any two) : [6]

i) ∆= 12δ 2 +δ . 1+ δ

2

4

ii) 1+ ∆( ) 1− ∇( )=1

iii) ∇yn+1 =h 1+ ∇2+ 5

12∇2 + ......

yn

b) Find the missing values in the following table : [10]

x : 45 50 55 60 65

y : 3.0 – 2.0 – –2.4

Q2) a) Fit a second degree parabola to the following data : [8]

x = 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0

y = 1.1 1.3 1.6 2.0 2.7 3.4 4.1

b) Find a real root of 2x – log10

x = 7 correct to four decimal places usingiteration method. [8]

P.T.O.

Q3) a) Apply Runge-Kutta method to find approximate value of y for x = 0.2 in

steps of 0.1, if dy

dx= x + y2 , given that y = 1 where x = 0. [8]

b) Solve, by iteration method, the following equations [8]

20x + y – 2z = 17

3x + 20y – z = –18

2x – 3y + 20z = 25.

Q4) a) The population of a certain town is shown in the following table : [9]Year 1921 1931 1941 1951 1961

Population 19.96 39.65 58.81 77.21 94.61(in thousands)

Find the rate of growth of population in 1951.

b) Evaluate : sin2 θ

5 + 4cosθ0

π

∫ dθ

by Simpson’s 13

rd

and 38

th

rule taking h=π6

. [8]

Q5) a) Using Lagrange’s formula, express the function

x2 + 6x −1x2 −1( ) x − 4( ) x − 6( )

as a sum of partial fractions. [6]b) Using Stirling’s formula, compute f(1.22) from the following data : [7]

x : 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4

f(x) : 0.841 0.891 0.932 0.963 0.985

c) Obtain the function whose first difference is 2x3 + 3x2 – 5x + 4. [4]

SECTION - II

Q6) a) Velocity distribution for a fluid flow is given by u = –x, v = 2y andw = 3–z. Find the equation of stream line passing through the point(1, 1, 2). [6]

b) Prove that Euler’s dynamical equations of motion is given by

dp

ρ+Ω+ 1

2∫ q( )2 − ∂φ

∂t = constant

[3765] - 221 -2-

Where ρ be the density, p the pressure, Ω the force potential, φ thevelocity potential and q the velocity of the fluid. [10]

Q7) a) If ρ and v are the density and velocity of a moving fluid then derive the

equation of continuity of fluid dynamics namely ∇ . ρv( )+ ∂p

∂t=0.

Also show that the above equation of continuity can be rewritten as

ρ∇ .v + v .∇ρ+ ∂p

∂t=0. [10]

b) If a fluid is at rest, dq

dt= 0, show that ∇× ρ F( )=0 and hence F .curl F = 0.

[6]

Q8) a) The density function of the time to failure of an appliance is

f (t)=32

t + 4( )3, t ( > 0) is in years :

i) Find the reliability function R(t).

ii) Find the failure rate λ (t).

iii) Find the MTTF. [6]b) A device has a decreasing failure rate characterized by a two-parameter

weibull distribution with α = 180 years and β = 0.5. The device isrequired to have a design life reliability of 0.90. [6]i) What is the design life, if there is no wear-in period?ii) What is the design life, if there is a wear-in period of 1 month in the

beginning?c) A component has MTBF = 100 hours and MTTR = 20 hours with both

failure and repair distributions exponential. Find the availability andunavailability of the component after a long time. [4]

Q9) a) A system may be found in one of the three states : [8]Operating, degraded or failed. When operating, it fails at constant rate of1 per day and becomes degraded at the rate of 1 per day. If degraded, its,failure rate increases to 2 per day. Repair occurs only in the failed modeand restores the system to the operating state with a repair rate of 4 perday. If the operating and degraded states are considered the availablestates, determine the steady-state availability. If λ =1; λ2 = 2;λ3 = 3 and

µ = 10, find the steady-state availability.

[3765] - 221 -3-

b) Six identical components with constant failure rates are connected in

i) High level redundancy with 3 components in each subsystem.

ii) Low level redundancy with 2 components in each subsystem.

Determine the component MTTF in each case, necessary to provide asystem reliability of 0.90 after 100 hours of operation. [8]

Q10)a) Obtain expressions for the reliabilities of [6]i) Series system and

ii) Parallel system.

Using them find out the reliability of the system give below :

b) The time to repair a power generator is best described by its p.d.f.

m(t)= t2

333, 1≤ t≤10 hours. [6]

i) What is the MTTR?

ii) Find the repair rate.

iii) Find the probability that a repair will be completed in 6 hours.

c) The time to failure of a piece of equipment (in operating hours) is uniformfrom 0 hr. to 1000 hr. [6]i) Compute the MTTF.

ii) Determine the MTTF if preventive maintenance will restore thesystem to as good as new and is performed every 100 operatinghours.

[3765] - 221 -4-


[3765] - 222M.E. (Instrumentation) (Process & Bio)

CONTROL SYSTEMS(2002 Course)









7) All questions carry equal marks.

P1682

SECTION - I

Q1) a) Obtain State space and transfer function representation for the systemshown in fig. 1. [16]

b) Derive the expression to obtain transfer function from state spacerepresentation. Also obtain transfer function if [9]

x1

x2

=1 0

1 1

x1

x2

+1

2

u

y = 8x1 + 2x

2 & D = [0].

P.T.O.

Q2) a) For the system shown in fig. 2. Find the output c(k) for r(t) equal to unitstep. Assume sampling T = 1 sec. [16]

b) Check the stability of the system and find eigenvectors if

A =−2 −1 −3

3 −2 −1

−6 −11 −6

[9]

Q3) a) Obtain the feedback gain ‘K’ for the system described by, [16]

x1

x2

x3

=0 1 0

0 −1 1

0 −1 −10

x1

x2

x3

+0

0

10

u

to meet the design specification : ξ = 0.5 & ωn = 2 rad / sec

b) Explain the role of sampler and hold in digital control system. [9]

SECTION - II

Q4) Design a digital control scheme for the system shown in fig. 3 to meet thefollowing specifications [25]a) The velocity error constant should be equal or greater than 10

b) Peak overshoot to step input should be equal or less than 25 percent.

c) Settling time should be less or equal to 2.5 seconds.

[3765] - 222 -2-

Q5) a) Explain the concept of empirical modeling with suitable diagram. Whatare the different techniques of system identification, explain each in short.

[16]

b) Design a PI controller for the system

G(s)= 52s + 1

using the controller synthesis. Select suitable tuning parameter (filter)α . [9]

Q6) Write short note on (Any three) : [25]

a) Concept of Dead beat controller and its design.

b) Concept of Internal model Control.

c) Controllability and observability.

d) Stability analysis methods of digital; systems.

[3765] - 222 -3-


[3765] - 227M.E. (Instrumentation)

MICROCONTROLLER APPLICATION IN INSTRUMENTATION(2002 Course) (506108)








6) Use of logarithmic tables slide rule, Mollier charts, electronic pocketcalculator and steam tables is allowed.


P1871

SECTION - I

Q1) Design a 4-digit BCD counter with LED display using 8051 Microcontroller,for counting objects passing over a conveyor belt. The objects are detected byusing a proximity switch. The proximity switch produces an output pulse of12V amplitude. Explain with the help of hardware diagram and softwareflowchart. [25]

Q2) What are the different constrains for designing a battery powered instrument?Support your answer with detailed case study. [25]


a) Multiplexing technique for display driver.

b) Key de-bouncing techniques.

SECTION - II

Q4) Explain schemes for input and output signal isolation used in microcontrollerbased system. Elaborate with the help of circuit schematics for both input andoutput interface. [25]

P.T.O.

Q5) Design a scheme for interfacing ADC 0809 with 8051 Microcontroller. Explainwith the help of circuit diagram and Software flowchart. [25]

Q6) Write short notes with reference to microcontroller 8051 : [25]

a) Interrupt structure.

b) Power-ON reset circuit.

[3765] - 227 -2-


[3765] - 236M.E. CSE (Information Technology)

OPERATING SYSTEMS(Revised Course - 2002)


Instructions to the candidates:1) Answer any three questions from each section.2) Figures to the right indicate full marks.3) Answers to the two sections should be written in separate books.4) Neat diagrams must be drawn wherever necessary.

P1684

SECTION - I

Q1) a) Describe four distributed computing system models with the help of neatdiagrams. [8]

b) Describe how address translation takes place with the help of neatdiagrams in [8]

i) Paging.

ii) Segmentation.

Q2) a) Explain what is meant by absolute ordering, consistent ordering and causalordering of messages. Give a mechanism to implement each one. [10]

b) How does the Gifford Quorum based protocol handle the network partitionproblem and increase the availability of write operations at the expenseof read operations? [8]

Q3) a) What are the desirable features of a good message passing system? [8]

b) Explain the three cache location policies. Which of these policies can bepreferred to extend scalability and reliability? [8]

Q4) a) Discuss the reasons why distributed computing systems are gainingpopularity? [8]

b) Implement the Dining Philosophers problem using semaphores anddiscuss how the critical section requirements are fulfilled. [8]

P.T.O.

SECTION - II

Q5) a) Discuss the desirable features of a good process migration mechanism.[8]

b) Describe the implementation of logical clocks using : [8]

i) Counters.

ii) Physical clocks.

Q6) a) Discuss the various data locating mechanisms that are used in a DSMsystem that uses the NRMB strategy. [8]

b) Explain the Bully and Ring election algorithms. Discuss the timecomplexity for both algorithms. [8]

Q7) a) Discuss the two protocols that are used to ensure sequential consistencyin a DSM system that uses the RMB strategy. [8]

b) Discuss the relative advantages and disadvantages of implementing athread package in user space and in the kernel. [8]

Q8) Write short notes (Any three) : [18]

a) Transparency.

b) Wait-wound and Wait-die schemes.

c) Group communication.

d) RPC.

[3765] - 236 -2-


[3765] - 237M.E. CSE (IT)

ADVANCED DATABASE SYSTEM(2002 Course)

Time : 3 Hours] [Max. Marks : 100Instructions to the candidates:

1) Question 1 and 8 are compulsory. Answer any other two questions fromeach section.

2) Answers to the two sections should be written in separate answer books.3) Neat diagrams must be drawn wherever necessary.4) Figures to the right indicate full marks.5) Assume suitable data, if necessary.

P1685

SECTION - I

Q1) a) Design an ER schema for keeping track of information about the votestaken in the US house of representatives during the current two yearcongressional session. The database needs to keep track of each US state’sName (e.g. Texas, New York) and include the Region of the state (whosedomain is Northeast, Midwest, Southeast, Southwest, West). EachCONGRESSPERSON in the House of Representatives is described byhis or her Name, plus the District represented, the Startdate when thecongressperson was first elected, and the political Party to which he orshe belongs (whose domain is Republican, Democrat, Independent,Other). The database keeps track of each BILL (i.e. proposed law),including the Billname, the Date Of Vote on the bill, whether the billPasedOrFailed (whose domain is Yes, No), and the Sponsor (thecongressperson(s) who sponsored-that is, proposed the bill). The databasekeeps track of how each congressperson voted on each bill (domain ofvote attribute is Yes, No, Abstain, Absent). Draw an ER schema diagramfor this application. State clearly any assumptions you make. [12]

b) What is meant by a recursive relationship type? Give three examples ofrecursive relationships types. [6]

Q2) a) Consider the following relations :

BOOKS (Books#, Primary_Author, Topic, Total_Stock, $Price)

BOOKSTORE (Store#, City, State, Zip, Inventory-value)

STOCK (Store#, Book#, Qty)

P.T.O.

i) Give an example of two simple predicates that would be meaningfulfor the BOOKSTORE relation for horizontal partitioning.

ii) How would a derived horizontal partitioning of STOCK be definedbased on the partitioning of BOOKSTORE?

iii) Show predicates by which BOOKS may be horizontally partitionedby topic.

iv) Show how the STOCK may be further partitioned from the partitionsin (ii) by adding the predicates in (iii). [10]

b) What is meant by data allocation in a DDBMS? What typical units ofdata are distributed over various sites? [6]

Q3) Discuss the following terms in the context of a DDBMS [16]a) Degree of Homogeneity.

b) Degree of local autonomy.

c) Distribution transparency.

d) Fragmentation transparency.

e) Location transparency.

f) Issues related to replication.

Q4) a) With suitable examples explain ‘Querying with Complex Types’. [6]b) Explain Reference types in object oriented databases with a suitable

example. [4]c) Compare Object Oriented and Relational Databases. [6]

SECTION - II


a) Time in Databases.

b) Spatial and Geographic databases.

c) Multimedia databases.

Q6) a) Compare Horizontal fragmentation with Vertical Fragmentation. Howdoes mixed fragmentation strike a right balance? Give suitable examples.

[8]

b) Describe the locking protocols in Distributed Databases. [8]

[3765] - 237 -2-

Q7) a) Compare Round-robin, Hash partitioning and Range partitioningtechniques with reference to I/O Parallelism. [8]

b) Write a note on ‘Handling of skew’. [8]

Q8) Automata Inc produces specialty vehicles by contract. The company operatesseveral departments, each one of which builds a particular vehicle, such as alimousine, a truck, a van, or an RV.

When a new vehicle is built, the department places an order with the purchasingdepartment to request specific components. Automata’s purchasing departmentis interested in creating a database to keep track of orders and to accelerate theprocess of delivering materials.

The order received by the purchasing department can contain several differentitems. An inventory is maintained so that the most frequently requested itemsare delivered almost immediately. When an order comes in, it is checked todetermine whether the requested item is in inventory. If an item is not ininventory, it must be ordered from a supplier. Each item may have severalsuppliers.

Given this functional description for the processes encountered at Automata’sprocessing department, do the following : [18]

a) Identify all the main entities.

b) Identify all the relations and connectivities among entities.

c) Identify the type of dependencies in all relations.

d) Give some examples of reports that can be obtained from the database.

[3765] - 237 -3-


[3765] - 261M.E. (Chemical)

ADVANCED MOMENTUM & HEAT TRANSFER(2002 Course) (Theory) (109101)


Instructions to the candidates:1) Answer any three questions from each section.2) Answers to the two sections should be written in separate books.3) Neat diagrams must be drawn wherever necessary.4) Figures to the right indicate full marks.5) Use of logarithmic tables, Mollier charts, electronic pocket calculator and

steam tables is allowed.6) Assume suitable data, if necessary.7) Write the chemical reactions wherever necessary.

P1692

SECTION - I

Q1) a) Derive an expression for velocity profile and average velocity for flowof falling film of Newtonian fluid. Note that the coordinate ‘x’ is measuredaway from the wall. State assumptions. [10]

b) Write a general expression for mass flow rate of a polymer liquid,described by Power Law model and show how the expression simplifiesto Hagen - Poiseuille Law. State conditions. [2]

c) Consider tangential laminar flow of an incompressible fluid between twovertical coaxial cylinders. The outer cone is rotating with an angularvelocity ω . Neglect end effects. Show that the velocity distribution Vθ

is given by the following expression.

Vθ = ωR kR / r − r / kR[ ] / k − 1 / k[ ]The radius of outer cylinder is R and that of inner cylinder is kR. [6]

Q2) a) Draw neat figure and explain construction and working of capillary tubeviscometer. [6]

b) For a flow of Bingham plastic fluid through a smooth circular tube, showthat

Q = π∆PR4 / 8µ0L[ ] 1 − 4 / 3( ) ζ0 / ζR( )+ 1 / 3( ) ζ0 / ζR( )4[ ]Assume common notations. [10]

c) Write Rabinowitsch-Mooney equation, explain notations and givedimensions. [2]

P.T.O.

Q3) a) Write Navier - Stokes equation and obtain Bernoulli equation from that.[4]

b) Derive dimensionless form of the equation of change and explain itssignificance. [6]

c) A viscous fluid is in laminar flow in a slit (length L and width W) formedby two parallel walls, distance 2B apart. Make a differential momentumbalance and show that the distribution of momentum flux is given by

ζXZ = p0 − pL( ) / L[ ]x [6]

Q4) a) i) Define non-Newtonian fluid. [2]ii) Discuss any three models of non-Newtonian fluid and give

relationship between shear stress and the rate of shear. [6]b) A power-law biological fluid, banana puree, is flowing at 24oC with a

velocity of 1 m/s, through a tube 6 m long having an inside diameter of0.02 m. The flow properties of fluid are K = 6.0 NS0.454 / m2. The densityof fluid is 960 kg/m3. Calculate the Reynolds Number and the pressuredrop. [8]

SECTION - II

Q5) a) Derive a correlation for fully developed heat transfer to a power-lawfluid in laminar flow, under isothermal tube wall condition. [12]

b) Two fluid streams are continuously mixed in an agitated reactor. Theheat generated is removed through a cooling coil at a rate Q, proportionalto the flow rate of exit stream. Show that the Q is directly proportional tothe diameter. [6]

Q6) a) A slab, occupying a space between y = –b to +b, is initially at a temperatureT0, At time t = 0, the surface temperature is suddenly raised to Ts andmaintained there. Find the transient temperature profile T(y, t). [8]

b) A slurry is being heated by pumping it through a well stirred heatingtank. The inlet temperature of slurry is Ti and the temperature of theouter surface of steam coil is Ts. Use the following symbols :V = slurryvolume in tank, ρ and cp = slurry density and heat capacity, w = slurrymass flow rate, U = overall heat transfer coefficient of coil, A = coil heattransfer area. Assume uniform fluid temperature in the tank and same asoutlet fluid temperature. By means of the energy balance, show that theslurry temperature T is described by the differential equation :

dT / dt = UA / ρcpV( ) Ts − T( )− w / ρV( ) T − Ti( ) [8]

[3765] - 261 -2-

Q7) a) A dilute polymer solution at 303 K flows over a heated plane surface at310 K (250 mm wide x 500 mm long). The rheological behavior of thisfluid can be approximated by a power law model with K = 1.6 Pa.S0.43.Calculate the thickness of thermal boundary layer at 90 mm from theleading edge, when free stream velocity is 1.5 m/s. [6]

b) Explain the effect of temperature dependent physical properties on theheat transfer. [6]

c) Write the equation of change for temperature, explain notations and givedimensions. Using the equation show that [2]

i) ρCp DT Dt( )= k∇2T + DP Dt( ) for ideal gas [2]

ii) ρCp DT Dt( )= k∇2T for stationary solid. [2]

Q8) Write notes on any four of the following : [16]a) Agitator scale-up.

b) Momentum transfer in boundary layers.

c) Turbulant flow.

d) Heat transfer augmentation.

e) Concept of tensor.

[3765] - 261 -3-


[3765] - 31M.E. (Civil - Structures)

NUMERICAL METHODS AND FINITE ELEMENT STRUCTURALANALYSIS









7) All questions carry equal marks.

P1638

SECTION - I

Q1) a) Solve the initial value problem ′u = u + t , u(0.4) = 0.41 in the interval[0.4, 1.0] using classical fourth order Runge Kutta Method (h = 0.2).[15]

b) Determine the largest eigen value and corresponding eigen vector of the

matrix

1 3 −1

3 2 4

−1 4 10

[10]

Q2) a) Solve the equation ∇2u = xy over the square domain 0 ≤ x ≤3, 0 ≤ y ≤3with u = 0 on the boundary (Assume h = k = 1). [12]

b) Solve the equation on ∂u

∂t= 2

∂ 2u

∂x2 0 < t < 1, 0 < x < 2 using Crank Nicolson

method, subject to initial and boundary conditions given byu(x, 0) = 50(4 – x) 0 ≤ x ≤ 2 & u(0 t) = 0 = u(4 t), 0 ≤ t ≤1. [13]

Q3) a) Using Galerkin Technique, solve the following boundary value problem

d2y

dx2+ y = x2 , y(0) = y(1) = 0. [13]

P.T.O.

b) Solve the following boundary value problem ′′y + y = − t , 0 < t < 1,y(0) = y(1) = 0 using Rayleigh Ritz method. [12]

SECTION - II

Q4) a) Derive strain displacement relationship for axisymmetric problem. [9]b) List the advantages & disadvantages of finite element method. [8]c) Explain band width reduction for solution of matrix. [8]

Q5) a) Explain frontal solver with its advantages & disadvantages. [8]

b) Explain Ritz method for solution of unknown adjustable parameters. [9]

c) Derive the stiffness matrix for CST from assumed polynomial function.[8]

Q6) a) Explain convergence & compatibility requirements by the assumed shapefunction. [8]

b)

Dsteel = 100 mm dsteel = 80 mm

D Aluminium = 80 mm; Est = 200 Gpa, E

AI = 70 GPa.

A composite bar is as shown in figure 6.b Find the change in length ofthis composite bar. [9]

c) Explain with example plain stress, plane strain Axisymmetric problem.[8]

[3765] - 31 -2-


[3765] - 401M.E. (Civil) (Const. & Mgmt.)

MATHEMATICS(Probabilistic Methods, Simulation Applications in Const.)









P1696

SECTION - I

Q1) What is simulation? When is it used? Which are the various types of simulation?Explain, with an example, the step-by-step procedure of Monte-Carlosimulation. [18]

Q2) a) A ready mix concrete plant is delivering concrete to 10 transit miners.Based on time-motion studies, it is observed that the R.M.C. plant remainsidle for 10% of the time, due to various reasons. If the transit minercapacity is 4 m3, and in a hour, if each miner is expected to make 5 trips,based on zero idle time, find the probability of achieving

i) 95% productivity per hour.

ii) 25% non-productivity per hour.

iii) 50% productivity per hour.

iv) 90% non-productivity per hour. [10]

b) Explain Binomial distribution and its use in project management, withan example. [6]

P.T.O.

Q3) a) Using the Griffi’s waiting line model, determine the optimal number ofhaul units, based on the following data :-i) Hourly cost of prime mover = Rs. 6,000/-.ii) Hourly cost of haul unit = Rs. 800/-.iii) Mean servicing time of prime moves = 2.0 minutes.iv) Mean arrival rate of haul unit = 10.0 minutes.v) Haul unit capacity = 4m3.vi) No of haul units in queue = 6.Put your computations in a tabular form. Show each sample calculation.

[12]b) Explain with an example each, SLI and LOR costs. [4]

Q4) Derive the formula for EOQ. Explain graphically, how EOQ balancesprocurement and inventory carrying costs. Explain sensitivity analysis on EOQwith an example. What is the advantage of performing sensitivity analysis?Explain. [16]

SECTION - II

Q5) a) A construction organisation has observed time growth on 10 of its buildingprojects as follows :- [12]Project No. % Time growth

1 24.02 5.03 39.04 21.05 68.56 12.07 43.88 8.99 29.3

10 72.4Determinei) Arithmetic mean.ii) Standard deviation.iii) Range.iv) Co-efficient of variance.v) Coefficient of Range.vi) Variance.

[3765] - 401 -2-

If the permissible standard deviation is 5%, identify the various reasonswhich might be responsible for the delay. Suggest suitable preventivemeasures in order to achieve the permissible limit.

b) Explain Spearman’s rank co-relation coefficient and its use, with anexample. [6]

Q6) Determine the multiple linear regression equation relating the concrete strengthwith the cement content and the w/c ratio, based on the data observed as givenbelow.

Sr. No. 28 days Cement W/CCompressive Content ratio

Strength (MPa) kg/m3

1 31 257 0.36

2 32 260 0.355

3 30.5 253 0.365

4 29.4 250 0.38

5 36.3 280 0.32

6 30.8 255 0.365

7 28.4 249 0.395

8 33.3 262 0.345

Use the equation thus generated, to predict the 28 days compressive strengthof a particular mix, for which the cement content is 245 kg/m3 at a W/C ratioof 0.325. [16]

Q7) a) For a data set generated using any 2 variables, explain graphically thevarious possibilities of their co-relation. For each possibility, explain themeaning of the particular corelation (Make use of a practical example,for explaination). [8]

b) Write the various formulae required to determine the partial as well asthe total corelation coefficients when the total variables involved are x1,x2, x3. [8]

Q8) Explain the following :

a) FCP(ma) and Vorster - Sears mathematical model. [8]b) Normal distribution and its applications in project management. [4]c) Types of risks in construction. [4]

[3765] - 401 -3-

[3765] - 401 -4-


[3765]-415M.E. (Civil Construction and Management)

CONSTRUCTION TECHNOLOGY

(2008 Course)


Instructions to the candidates :


2) Question No. 1 and 5 are compulsory. Out of the remaining attempt any twoquestions from Section I and two questions from Section II.




6) Use of logarithmic tables, slide rule, Moiller charts, electronic pocketcalculator and steam tables is allowed.

7) Assume suitable data wherever necessary.

SECTION - I

Q1) a) A circular cofferdam of 10m diameter was proposed wherein followingoptions were considered for method of construction. [10]

i) R.C.C. diaphragm wall 60cms. thick.

ii) Interlocking circular piles of 800mm dia.

Select any one of the above giving its advantages over the other.

b) Explain in details with neat sketches the sequence of operations involvedfor the method of construction selected by you in (a) above for completingthe pier foundation. [8]

Q2) a) Draw a neat sketch of a ‘Casting yard’ and explain method oftransportation you will adopt to take ‘Precast prestressed concrete girders’to the launching site for a river bridge. The Casting yard is 1.5km awayfrom the bridge. Indicate time you will take for each activity. [8]

b) List out safety measures you will take for ‘Efficient functioning oflaunching operations’ at site mentioned in (a) above. [8]

P1703

P.T.O.

Q3) a) Precast segmental construction was adopted in a ‘Flyover Bridge’construction Having 10 segments per span. List out and explain in shortvarious activities involved, from ‘Clearance of the site’ till completionof the work. [8]

b) Explain with sketches ‘Method of launching’ adopted to complete onespan of 10 segments in 7 days. [8]

Q4) Write short notes on any three of the following: [16]

a) Properties of grout mixes used for structural and geotechnical works.

b) Tunnel form work and Mivan form work.

c) Advantages and disadvantages of ‘Well point system’ of dewatering.

d) Slip form shuttering in ‘High rise buildings’.

SECTION - II

Q5) What are the precautions and items you will look into, in construction of atwenty-two storied building for following activities to achieve high quality ofworkmanship.

a) R.C.C. Footings placed at 3.0m below ground level having water tableat 1.5m below ground level. [9]

b) Each floor slab to be completed in a 12-day cycle. [9]

Q6) a) Give specifications and properties of bentonite slurry used in theconstruction of bored piles. [8]

b) Explain with neat sketches the method of construction of bored pileswith “Direct Mud Circulation Method”. [8]

Q7) List out and explain activities involved in determining the “Rate of Advance”in Hard Rock Tunneling. [16]

Q8) A 200 tones capacity 760 mm diameter pile failed in a load test. List out andexplain the “Defects in the pile” which might have caused the failure. [16]

Y

[3765] - 415 2


[3765]-416M.E. (Civil Construction and Management)

INFRASTRUCTURE DEVELOPMENT(2008 Course) (Elective - III)

Time : 4 Hours] [Max. Marks : 100Instructions to the candidates :

1) Answer any three questions from each section.2) Question No. 1 and 5 are compulsory. Out of the remaining attempt any two

questions from Section I and two questions from Section II.3) Answers to the two sections should be written in separate answer books.4) Neat diagrams must be drawn wherever necessary.5) Figures to the right indicate full marks.6) Use of logarithmic tables, slide rule, Mollier charts, electronic pocket

calculator and steam tables is allowed.7) Assume suitable data wherever necessary.

SECTION - I

Q1) With reference to Central Budget for the year 2010-2011, presented by theUnion Finance Minister of India, explain the following:

a) Formation of a separate finance company for infrastructure projects.[2]

b) Provisions for energy and environment sectors. [6]

c) Taxation policy applied to basic resources, infrastructure projects. [6]

d) Funding for infrastructure development and specially for ruraldevelopment. [4]

Q2) Explain the basics of the Public Private Partnerships (PPP) being adopted forInfrastructure Projects. With respect to the three basic legal rights explain thefollowing B.O.T. mechanisms: [16]

a) B.T. b) B.O.T.

c) B.O.O. d) B.O.O.S.

Elaborate the problems that may arise in PPP projects.

Q3) Discuss the various mechanisms in which the Highway projects in India arefinanced. Give suitable examples for the same. Mention and explain in brief:

[16]

a) JNNURM. b) PMGSY.

P1704

P.T.O.

Q4) Explain the following in brief (any four): [16]

a) Provisions for infrastructure development in the XIth 5 year plan.

b) Rajiv Gandhi Vidyut Yojana.

c) Mono Rail project in Mumbai.

d) Pune Metro various issues.

e) Nuclear Energy programmes in India.

f) Ports connectivity Project.

SECTION - II

Q5) a) What are the different methods of construction used in Metro Railways?[6]

b) What are the advantages of stabilization of soils by temporary supportsagainst open excavation? [6]

c) Give advantages of carrying out construction by Ground Anchors,Diaphragm walls etc. [6]

Q6) a) While planning of BRTS for a city to arrive at a total infrastructure cost,what are the different areas that will be required to be studied, and workout their cost implication involved for a particular project? [8]

b) Explain the features of any one area listed in Q.6.a. in detail. [8]

Q7) a) Discuss about the various agencies and authorities involved in theplanning and execution of National Highways, Expressways and Ruralroad development at national level. Draw a suitable organisation chartfor the same. [8]

b) Explain in detail the roles and responsibilities of each agency listed aboveand areas to be covered to execute the project efficiently. [8]

Q8) a) What are the major activities and clearances required in ULTRA MEGAPower Project covered under the schemes for the development of ThermalPower Projects? [8]

b) Explain in detail, any one of the above activity and areas of work wheredetailed planning is required? [8]

Y[3765] - 416 2

!

" #$%$

& '($)

*((!##

+ ,!%($##%####

- $#.!

!"! # ! $ %

&'

l16p

22

=

0sds

d:Prove 22

12

2

=+ φφ

&!( ( )2

2

cr a

DKNy:prove =

&(!


[3765] - 445M.E. (Civil - Hyd.)

OPEN CHANNEL HYDRAULICS(2008 Course) (501308)


Instructions to the candidates:1) Answer any three questions from Section I and three questions from Section II.2) Answers to the two sections should be written in separate answer books.3) Neat diagrams must be drawn wherever necessary.4) Figures to the right indicate full marks.5) Your answer will be valued as a whole.6) Use of electronic pocket calculator is allowed.7) Assume suitable data, if necessary.

P1707

SECTION - I

Q1) a) What is the basic difference between Open Channel Flow and ClosedChannel Flow? Explain it in detail with a diagram. Can you co-relateBernoulli’s Equation for closed channel flow with Specific EnergyEquation of Open Channel Flow? While solving the equation of SpecificEnergy we get three roots of ‘y’ but consider only two roots. What isyour comment about the third root of ‘y’? [9]

b) Differentiate between actual loss and theoretical loss in a Hydraulic Jumpin an open channel. Prove that the loss due to Hydraulic Jump is equal to(Y1 – Y2)3/4Y1Y2. Y1 & Y2 are the pre jump and post jump depths in aHydraulic Jump. [9]

Q2) a) What do you mean by channel transition? Discuss about formation ofHydraulic Jump in expanding channel. How Hydraulic jump is formedon a sloping floor? [8]

b) In Gradually Varied Flow most of the time we focus only on MILD andSTEEP flow profiles. Rarely do we discuss about ADVERSE,HORIZONTAL and CRITICAL flow profiles. Why is it so? Discuss it indetail. [8]

P.T.O.

Q3) a) Discuss in detail about the ‘Standard Step Method of ‘Gradually VariedFlow’. In manual calculation you are supposed to take three to four steps.If the calculation is done by computer then one can even take one hundredsteps. Comment on the convergence of the error, if the calculation isdone with the help of computer programming. [8]

b) What is the Major Differential Equations involved with ‘Spatially VariedFlow’. Discuss it in detail and give the general solution of the DifferentialEquation. [8]

Q4) Write short notes (Any Four) : [16]

a) Draw Down Curve.

b) S-2 Profile.

c) Chow’s Method.

d) Significance of Froude Number in Hydraulic Jump.

e) Application of Finite Difference Method in Open Channel Hydraulics.

f) Hydraulic Exponent in Open Channel Flow.

SECTION - II

Q5) a) What do you mean by ‘Flood Routing’? Discuss in detail aboutMuskinghum method along with all the governing MathematicalEquations. [9]

b) Discuss in detail about ‘Variable Stage-Discharge Relations’ in an OpenChannel. [9]

Q6) a) What do you mean by Surge? Explain it with neat Diagrams. What is thedifference between positive and negative surge? Give one example foreach. [8]

b) A 10 metre wide rectangular channel supplies 35 m3/s water at a normaldepth of 2 metre to a turbine installation site. Due to a major reduction inload, the supply to the turbine is cut down to 5 m3/s only. Determine thevelocity of propagation of the surge wave and also the height of the surge.

[8]

Q7) a) A river Flowing toward the sea at a velocity of 5 km/hour and having adepth of 2 metre encounters an incoming tide which increases the depth to5 metre and a tidal bore travel travels upstream. Estimate the speed of thebore and speed and direction of flow after the passage of the bore. [8]

[3765] - 445 -2-

b) A rectangular channel carries a discharge of 10 m3/s per metre widthover a bed slope of 0.0004. If the depth of flow at a section is 5m, howfar upstream or downstream the flow depth will be within 8% of thenormal depth. Take Manning’s ‘n’ as 0.016, use direct step method andtake only two steps. Sketch the profile and classify it. [8]

Q8) Write short notes (Any Four) : [16]

a) Exchange Coefficients.

b) Solitary Waves.

c) Relationship between Bulk Modulus and Celerity.

d) Difference between Steady and Strong jump.

e) Theory of Turbulence.

f) Velocity and Momentum Correction Factor.

[3765] - 445 -3-


[3765] - 454M.E. (Civil - Structures)

ADVANCED DESIGN OF CONCRETE STRUCTURES(2008 Course)






4) Use of IS 456, IS 1343, IS 3370 & non programmable calculator is allowed.


6) Assume any other data if necessary.

P1874

SECTION - I

Q1) a) Draw yield lines for the following : [8]

i) Rectangular slab with simple supports on three adjacent side withone shorter side fixed.

ii) Rectangular slab fixed at two adjacent side and column at the corneropposite corner.

b) Explain with sketches the difference between yield line theory andHillerborgs strip method for analysis of slab. [7]

c) Design a RCC slab for a circular hall of diameter 5.6 m using Yield LineTheory. Assume the peripheral fixed support thickness 230 mm. Use M20Fe 500 take Live load = 5 kN/m2 & floor finish load = 1.2 kN/m2. Drawdetails of reinforcement. [10]

Q2) a) Design a flat slab for a hall with column spacing 6.4 m x 6.4 m c/c. Thesize of the column is 500 mm x 500 mm each. Use M25 Fe500 take Liveload = 5 kN/m2 & floor finish load = 1 kN/m2. Draw details ofreinforcement. [10]

b) Design a grid slab for a floor of hall 12 x 18 m c/c having square grid of1.5 m. Use M20 Fe500 take Live load = 5 kN/m2 & floor finish load =1.5 kN/m2. Apply the required check & draw reinforcement details.[15]

P.T.O.

Q3) Design a staging for circular type ESR for 3 Lakh liters with staging height12m using M25, Fe500 in earthquake zone III. Safe bearing capacity is200 kN/m2. Design of container is not required. Assume approx dimension ofcontainer, wall, top, bottom slab thickness, beams sizes & number of columns.Design must include Calculations of vertical loads and horizontal forcecalculations. Design the bracings, columns and foundations. Draw thereinforcement details. [25]

SECTION - II

Q4) a) Write detailed note on flanged shear wall. [5]

b) Design deep beam of a hall for flexure and shear for the following

Clear span = 4.5 m, width of support = 500 mm, working UDL on thebeam 1300 kN/m. Take the total depth of beam = 3.2m. Use M35 &Fe500. Show all Analysis and Design calculations & draw thereinforcement details. [20]

Q5) Design post tensioned prestressed concrete slab for a floor for the following

Flat interior panel of 5.5 m x 5.5 m, live load on slab 5 kN/m2, floor finish loadon slab = 1.5 kN/m2, concrete grade M50 HT steel is cables of cross sectionalarea 120 mm2 with fy = 1900 N/mm2. Design cables to serve as beams. Assume3 panels in each direction (floor size 16.5 m x 16.5 m) width of the beam onperiphery of floor 600 mm and column size 600 mm x 600 mm. Design mustinclude check fiber stresses in concrete and deflection. Draw sketches showingcable profiles. [25]

Q6) A two span prestressed concrete continuous beam ABC having cross section200 x 800 mm simply supported at A & C and continuous over B with M45and multistrand cables 2 Nos 12T13 with fy = 1900 N/mm2 stressed to 75% offy, each span is of 13m, superimposed load on both the spans 15 kN/m, Assume18% loss of prestress. [25]

a) Determine primary, secondary moment at support at prestress and deadload.

b) Calculate shift, and stress in extreme fibers at working load.

c) Draw the resultant line of thrust at working load.

[3765] - 454 -2-


[3765] - 47M.E. (Mechanical Engg. - Heat Power)

ADVANCED FLUID MECHANICS(2002 Course)





3) Use of logarithmic tables, slide rule and non-programmable calculator isallowed.

4) Assume suitable data, if required.

P1907

SECTION - I

Q1) Consider fully developed flow between two parallel plates, separated by adistance 2h.

a) Simplify the Navier-Stokes equations for this case. [3]

b) Present the boundary conditions. [3]

c) Solve for the velocity profile. [7]

d) Determine the average velocity, in terms of the maximum velocity. [4]

Q2) a) List any 2 assumptions of the boundary layer theory. [2]

b) Assuming a linear velocity profile within the boundary layer, determinethe boundary layer thickness δ as a function of x. [10]

c) Derive the expression for the skin friction coefficient Cf for the same

linear velocity profile. [5]

Q3) For compressible flows :

a) Derive expressions for T0

T and p0

p, where T

0 and p

0 are the stagnation

temperature and pressure respectively. [4]

b) Derive the variation of Mach number with respect to the Area ratio A

A∗

for a converging diverging nozzle. [12]

P.T.O.

Q4) a) What are the first order Forward and Backward difference expressions

for ∂u

∂x? [2]

b) List the steps in solvingu

t + au

x = 0

using the McCormack method, where ‘a’ is a constant. What is the stabilitycriterion? [5]

c) Apply the McCormack method to the continuity equation for twodimensional compressible flow. Show how the density is updated. [9]

SECTION - II

Q5) a) Derive the continuity equation in cartesian coordinates for twodimensional compressible flow. [15]

b) Deduce the equation for 2 dimensional incompressible flow. [2]

Q6) a) Derive the expression for the substantial derivative Du

Dt. [8]

b) Using the substantial derivative expression (or otherwise), derive the Euler(inviscid momentum) equation in the x-direction. [8]

Q7) Let the velocity profile be given as :u = 2xy,

υ = x2 – y2

a) Is this a possible case of incompressible flow? [3]b) If so, what is the stream function? [4]c) Is the flow irrotational? [3]d) If so, what is the velocity potential? [4]e) Compute the pressure difference between the points (2, 1) and (0, 0).

Assume density = 1. [3]

Q8) A (two-dimensional) body is placed in a uniform flow of velocity U. On thewake side, the velocity profile is measured (at an x-location) as u = f(y). Thebody is in open space. The point where the wake velocity is measured issufficiently far from the body, so that the pressure recovery can be assumed.a) Draw a control volume to indicate the flow of mass and momentum.[3]b) Perform mass balance across the control volume. [5]c) Perform momentum balance and thus determine the Drag force. [8]

[3765] - 47 -2-


[3765]-473M.E. (Mech - Heat Power)

NUMERICAL METHODS IN THERMAL & FLUID ENGINEERING(2008 Course)


1) Answer any three questions from each section.2) Answers to the two sections should be written in separate answer books.3) Neat diagrams must be drawn wherever necessary.4) Figures to the right indicate full marks.5) Use of logarithmic tables, slide rule, Mollier charts, electronic pocket

calculator and steam tables is allowed.6) Assume suitable data wherever necessary.

SECTION - I

Q1) a) Solve the Leonardo equation: [10]

f(x) = x3 + 2x2 + 10x – 20 = 0

by Muller’s method. Perform four iterations.

b) What is pivoting? Distinguish between partial pivoting and completepivoting. [6]

Q2) a) Given the table of values: [12]

i 0. 1 2 3

xi 1 2 3 4f(xi) 0.5 0.3333 0.25 0.2

estimate the value of f(2.5) using cubic spline functions.

b) State the conditions for a spline to be cubic. [4]

Q3) a) Given the table of data: [10]

x 1 2 3 4

z 0 1 2 3y 12 18 24 30

Obtain a regression plane to fit the data. You may assume curvey = a + bx + cz.

P1919

P.T.O.

b) A 20 MW Kaplan turbine operates under a static head of 16m and islocated at a hillstation 1800m above MSL. The following table givesspecific speed NS and Thoma’s cavitation factor σ.

Ns 300 400 500 600 700

σ 0.2 0.35 0.57 0.81 0.95

Find σ at 350. [8]

Q4) a) Explain the partitioning method of inverting a matrix, and derive therelevent expressions. When can this method be beneficially used? [8]

b) Use Gauss - Seidel method to solve the following system of equations.

5 1 1

1 8 0 . 5

−1 1 6

x1

x2

x3

=

4

0 . 5

−7

carry out 4 iterations. [8]

SECTION - II

Q5) a) If the velocity distribution of a fluid flowing through a circular pipe isknown, the flow rate Q can be computed by

Q = v∫ dA

Where v = velocity = 3.0 1 − rr0

1 7

.

r = radial distance measured from the centre of pipe.

r0 = radius of the pipe.

A = cross sectional area of pipe = πr2.

Compute the value of Q for r0 = 10. Use Gauss legendre three pointformula. [10]

b) What is numerical differentiation? [4]

c) Explain difference between curve fitting and interpolation. [4]

[3765] - 473 2

Q6) Determine the coefficient of the characteristic polynomial of the system–(–1 –λ) x1 = 0

x1 + (–2 –λ) x2 + 3x3 = 02x2 + (–3 –λ) x3 = 0

using the Fadeer - Leverrier method. Also calculate the eigen values and theireigen vectors. [16]

Q7) a) Solve the equation. [10]

2d2ydx2 = 3x

dydx

− 9y + 9 subject to the condition y(0) =1, ′ y 0( ) = −2

using Euler’s method and compute y for x = 0.1 (0.1) 0.3.b) For the case of water draining out from the bottom of a tank, the water

level in the tank can be given as,

dydt

= −k y .

Where k = 0.2. m1/2 / min.The initial condition is y = 2.5 m at t = 0.Integrate this form t = 0 to t = 2 min using forward Euler’s method withδt = 0.5 min. [8]

Q8) a) Solve the equation:2ut2 =

2ux2

subject to the following conditionsu(0, t) = 0, u(1, t) = 0 t > 0

and ut

x, 0( ) = 0 u(x, 0) = sin3(Πx) for all x in 0 ≤ x ≤ 1. [10]

Take h = 0.2, (along x aixs) check the condition for explicite solution.Take k = 0.2. Find values of u at t = 0.4.

b) Evaluate the integral

I = dx dyx + yx =1

2

∫y=1

1.5

∫

using the Simpson’s 13

rd

rule with h = 0.5 (along x aixs) and y = 0.25

(along y axis). [6]

Y[3765] - 473 3


[3765] - 49M.E. (Mechanical Engg. - Heat Power)

THERMAL AND MECHANICAL DESIGN OF HEAT EXCHANGER(2002 Course)








6) Use of logarithmic tables, slide rule, mollier charts, non-programmableelectronic pocket calculator is allowed.

P1946

SECTION - I

Q1) a) Explain the heat exchanger design methodology with flowchart. [8]

b) Show that for counterflow heat exchanger when,

Cmin

Cmax

=1, effectiveness is given by ε = NTU

1 + NTU with standard notation.

[8]

Q2) a) At 80 km/h, at inlet temperature of the air to an automobile radiator is37.8oC. Water enters at 98.9oC with a flow rate of 1.89 kg/s and leaveswith a temperature of 93.3oC. UA for this radiator is 960.6 W/K. Determinethe air flow rate and air outlet temperature for this radiator using bothLMTD and ε -NTU methods. Assume C

p for air and water as 1.01 and

4.19 respectively. The radiator is unmixed on air side and mixed on waterside. [8]

b) Write a short note on : Spiral heat exchanger. [8]

Q3) a) What are the various correction (j) factors considered for shell side heattransfer coefficient in Bell Delaware method? [8]

b) Evaluate the pressure drop for air and water for equal flow rate through a25 mm ID and 3 m long circular tube. Air and water are at 25oC.

P.T.O.

Assume f = 16/Re for laminar flow and f = 0.00128 + 0.1143 Re–0.311 forturbulent flow. The fluid properties are : [8]

Properties Air Water

Specific heat, Cp (J/kg.K) 1009 4187

Dynamic viscosity, µ (Pa.s) 0.184 x 10–4 8.853 x 10–4

Thermal conductivity, k (W/m.K) 0.0261 0.602

Density, ρ (kg/m3) 1.183 996.4

Prandtl number, Pr 0.71 6.16

Q4) Write short notes on (any three) : [18]a) Causes and effects of fouling.b) Rod baffles in heat exchanger.c) Flow induced vibrations.d) Plate and finned tube heat exchangers.

SECTION - II

Q5) a) Explain the step by step procedure for design of finned tube heatexchanger. [8]

b) Enlist and explain the standards used in heat exchanger design. [8]

Q6) a) A double pipe heat exchanger is used to condense steam at a rate of0.03 kg/s at 50oC. Cooling water enters through the tubes at a rate of0.9 kg/s at 10oC. The specific enthalpy of phase change h

fg of water is

2382.7 kJ/kg and the specific heat of water is 4.18 kJ/kg K. The tube(M.S. with k = 45 W/m K) OD and ID are 25.4 mm and 22.1 mmrespectively. The heat transfer coefficient on the steam side is10000 W/m2 K and that of on the cooling water side is 8000 W/m2 K.Inside and outside fouling resistances are 0.176 and 0.088 m2 K/kW,respectively.Determine the outside surface area and length required for the plain tubefor clean and fouled heat exchangers. [12]

b) Explain in brief : Heat pipe heat exchanger. [6]

Q7) Distilled water with a flow rate of 60 kg/s enters a baffled shell-and-tube heatexchanger at 32oC and leaves at 25oC. Heat via be transferred to 140 kg/s ofraw water coming from supply at 20oC. Design and estimate constructionalparameters of heat exchanger. A single shell and single pass is preferable. Thetube diameter is 19 mm OD and 16 mm ID and tubes are laid out on

[3765] - 49 -2-

25.4 mm sq. pitch. The maximum length of heat exchanger required is of 7 mbecause of space limitation. Estimate shell side heat transfer coefficient byKern method; assuming constant properties.

The properties of the fluid at average temperature are :

Properties Tube side fluid Shell side fluid

Specific heat, Cp (J/kg.K) 4182 4179

Dynamic viscosity, µ (Pa.s) 10.02 x 10–4 8.15 x 10–4

Thermal conductivity, k (W/m.K) 0.598 0.612

Density, ρ (kg/m3) 998.2 996

Prandtl number, Pr 7.01 5.75

[16]

Q8) a) Explain the meaning of the following key terms used in mechanical designof heat exchanger.Design pressure, Design temperature, Maximum allowable workingpressure, Joint efficiency, and Allowable stress. [8]

b) What are the various components of pressure drop considered whilecalculating the total shell side pressure drop in Bell Delaware method?Explain in details. [8]

[3765] - 49 -3-


[3765] - 492M.E. (Mechanical) (Design Engineering)

MATHEMATICAL MODELLING AND ANALYSIS(2008 Course) (Part - I) (502201)







5) Assume suitable data, if necessary. But mention it clearly.

6) Use of scientific calculator is allowed.

P1879

SECTION - I

Q1) Write short notes on any three of the following : [18]

a) Cause variable and Effect variables.

b) System, Environment and Variables.

c) Lumped and Distributed parameter systems.

d) Static and Dynamic Systems.

Q2) a) Figure Q2(a) shows a block diagram. Apply block diagram algebra toevaluate c/r. [8]

b) Construct signal flow graph for Figure Q2(a) and obtain expression forc/r using Masson’s Gain Formula. [8]

P.T.O.

Q3) For state space representation given by [16]

x1

x2

=0 1

−25 −10

x1

x2

Construct signal flow graph for this system. Applying Masson’s Gain Formula

obtain state transition matrix X1(s)

X2 (s)

Q4) a) Figure Q4(a) shows an electrical speed control system. The inputpotentiometer provides a reference input voltage (E

r) proportional to

desired speed (Nin) that is (E

r - K

rN

in). A voltage signal (E

c) which is

proportional to the controlled output speed (No) is provided by the

tachometer (Ec = K

cN

o). The error (E

r – E

c) is amplified by an electronic

amplifier whose output is (Ef = K

a(E

r – E

c)). The voltage (E

f) is applied to

the field of the field controlled dc motor. The torque exerted on the shaftby the motor torque is proportional to the field current that is(T

m = K

mI

f). Determine the overall block diagram for the case in which

the load torque consists of an inertial load (JD2 θ = JDNo) and an external

torque (TL). [8]

b) Find f(A) = eAt for [8]

A= A=0 2

−2 −4

[3765] - 492 -2-

=

=

Q5) a) Define Masson’s Gain formula with suitable block diagram andcorresponding signal flow graph. [8]

b) Discuss Linear Graph Models. [8]

SECTION - II

Q6) a) For the transformed equation [10]

C(s)= 12V (s)−10(s + 6)U(s)s2 + 7s + 12

Determine the response when

i) V(s) is unit step and U(s) = 0.

ii) V(s) = 0 and U(s) is unit step.

b) Determine solution of the differential equation using Laplace TransformMethod.

(D3 + 4D2 + 5D + 2) y(t) = f(t)

Where f(t) = 2e–t and all initial conditions are zero. [8]

Q7) a) Determine the z transform of f(t) = cos(ωt ) using Residue method. [8]

b) The z transform of a digital control system is

C(z)= zz + 2

z − 1.0( ) z + 0.5( ) z − 0.2( )Determine the inverse z transform. [8]

[3765] - 492 -3-

Q8) Figure shows a square plate. The temperature of the edges is as shown in

Figure Q7(a). Using Laplace Equation ∂ 2T

∂x2+ ∂ 2T

∂y2= 0 and Libmann’s method

obtain the temperatures of inside nodes. Compute four iterations and tabulatethe result. [16]

Q9) a) Using Fourier Integral Formula prove that [8]

e− x cos x = 2π

λ2 + 2( )cos xλλ4 + 4

dλ0

∞

∫

b) Digital and Analogue simulation. [8]

Q10)Write short notes on any two of the following : [16]a) Successive relaxation in solution of Elliptic Differential Equations.

b) Explain in brief the types of simulation approaches.

c) Crank Nicholson Method.

[3765] - 492 -4-


[3765] - 500M.E. (Mechanical) (Design Engineering)VIBRATIONS AND NOISE CONTROL






4) Use of logarithmic table and electronic pocket calculator is allowed.


P1727

SECTION - I

Q1) For the system shown in Fig. No. 1, determine natural frequencies and modeshapes using influence coefficient method. Sketch the first mode.

Take k1 = 2 kN/m, k

2 = 1.5 kN/m, k

3 = 2 kN/m.

m1 = 100 kg, m

2 = 200 kg, m

3 = 300 kg [16]

Q2) Find first two natural frequencies of transverse vibrations of a cantilever beamhaving length ‘l’, constant thickness ‘t’, height at the fixed end ‘b’ and at thefree end zero using Rayleigh-Ritz method. [16]

Q3) A uniform beam of length 2600 mm and the cross sectional area 60 mm2 ispivoted freeling at one end. A 6 kg mass is attached firmly to the other end ofthe beam which rest on the rim of a wheel having radius 250 mm and rotatingat constant speed of 1200 rpm. The coefficient of friction between the beamand the wheel is (0.3 – 0.001 v) where v is the relative velocity at the line ofcontact between the beam and the wheel. Determine the vibration of the massat the end of the beam and comment on it. Take E = 2 * 1011 N/m2 for the beammaterial. [16]

P.T.O.

Q4) a) Differentiate between pulse and impulse force on vibratory system. [6]b) Find the response equation of an undamped spring mass system subjected

to an isosceles triangular pulse force of height ‘F0’ and duration ‘ τ ’.[10]

Q5) Write the short notes of the following (Any two) : [18]a) Tuned Absorber.b) Influence coefficients.c) Axial vibrations of bar.

SECTION - II

Q6) a) Explain with suitable example experimental modal analysis. [6]b) State and explain different machine condition monitoring and machine

vibration monitoring techniques. [10]

Q7) a) Explain Wide band and narrow band random vibrations. [6]b) Give three examples of random input. How will you proceed to find their

Spectral Density?

Calculate the Autocorrelation function corresponding to the ideal whitenoise and to the unit step function. [10]

Q8) The motion of mechanical system with nonlinear restoring force is given bythe equation ˙x +wn

2x +βx3 =0 with initial conditions x(0) = A and x(0)= 0where w

n is the natural frequency of linear system.

Using Perturbation method show that w2 = wn2 + 3 4βA2 upto first order

correction. [16]

Q9) a) Define sound pressure level, sound power level and sound intensity. Whatis the sound pressure level of a sound source radiating energy at the rateof 0.4 W? [10]

b) Explain Octave band analysis of sound. [6]

Q10)Write the short notes of the following (Any two) : [18]a) Phase plane technique.

b) Noise absorber.

c) Auto correlation function.

[3765] - 500 -2-

[3765] - 500 -3-


[3765] - 524M.E. (Electrical) (Control System)

ADVANCED MATHEMATICAL TECHNIQUE FOR CONTROLSYSTEM



1) Answer Q.No. 1 or Q.No. 2, Q.No. 3 or Q.No. 4, Q.No. 5 or Q.No. 6, Q.No. 7or Q.No. 8, Q.No. 9 or Q.No. 10, Q.No. 11 or Q.No. 12.






P1881

SECTION - I

Q1) a) Explain the concept of convex function. [8]

b) Write the limitations of method of differential calculus. [8]

OR

Q2) a) Explain the method of Lagrange multipliers. [8]

b) Explain the concept of constrained extrema. [8]

Q3) a) Explain the multivariable optimization with no constraints. [9]

b) What do you understand by Hessian matrics, explain how to test thematrix? [8]

OR

Q4) Use analytical method to investigate for extremium points

f(x) = x13 + x

23 + x

33 + 2x

12 + 6x

22 + 9x

32. [17]

Q5) Solve the following system of equations by using Pivot operations. [17]4x1 + 3x2 + x3 = 13

3x1 + 7x

3 = 24

x1 + 2x

2 + 3x

3 = 14.

OR

P.T.O.

Q6) a) Write the standard form of Linear programming problem. [9]b) Explain what do you understand by dual simplex method. [8]

SECTION - II

Q7) a) Explain the Dichotomous search method. [9]b) Explain what do you understand by Unimodal function. [8]

OR

Q8) Maximize the fn. f(x) = x/2 for x ≤ 2 and this function = –x + 3 for the intervalx ≥ 2, In the interval (0, 3) by fibonacy search using n = 6 (or within anaccuracy of 10%). [17]

Q9) What is multistage decision process also explain the concept ofsuboptimization? [17]

OR

Q10)Explain the method of unconstrained geometric programming problem fromdifferential calculus point of view. Discuss the degree of difficulty andsufficiency condition. [17]

Q11)a) Explain the concept of stochastic programming. [8]b) Explain the Integer non linear programming. [8]

OR

Q12)Explain the stochastic dynamic programming. Discuss optimality criterionand stochastic nature of the optimum decision in brief. [16]

[3765] - 524 -2-

! "# $% &' ( $%

)*)*+,-)-

,.-,))*/0

! 1.*.*,$++

" 2$+.*-+ +,+,+++++),

# -+, $0

!

"#

$ %

& & '(#& & )

1α *+, 2α *-., ( (

"#

)

/ &0 & && 1 #(

!

2',,3& &4,56&+& & -,,, & & 7 / 0488 &. )

" 9 9

:9/

;#9#("< #"=)#/3 )

"#

) ( 3 (

2

"#

2

6:9 :9

& < > ( ? =

:=?=1:==

"#

/ :/) )


[3765] - 540M.E. (Electrical) (Power Systems)

COMPUTER APPLICATIONS IN POWER SYSTEM(2008 Course)







P1882

SECTION - I

Q1) a) Explain the optimization problem based on : [12]

i) Nature of design variables.

ii) Nature of equations involved.

b) Explain the multivariable optimization with equality constraints by themethod of Lagrange multiplier. [13]

Q2) a) State the Kuhn Tucker conditions. [5]

b) What are the different Random search methods of unconstrainedminimization? Explain any one. [10]

c) Explain Steepest Descent method along with its flow chart. [10]

Q3) a) Explain the Newton Raphson method of load flow analysis (Rectangularform). [12]

b) What are the methods of load flow under contingency conditions? Explainany one in details. [13]

P.T.O.

SECTION - II

Q4) a) Explain Optimal Power Flow based on Gradient method. [12]b) Derive transmission loss formula in terms of transmission loss coefficients.

[13]

Q5) a) Explain : [13]i) DC load flow.

ii) Power loss in a line and

iii) Generation shift distribution factors with reference to Losscoefficients using sensitivity factors.

b) Explain three phase load flow method. [12]

Q6) Explain the following :

a) Formulation of sequence impedance matrix in terms of self and mutualimpedances using transformation matrix. [12]

b) A.C. - D.C. load flow analysis. [13]

[3765] - 540 -2-



POWER SYSTEM PLANNING AND RELIABILITY(2008 Course)









P1883

SECTION - I

Q1) a) Explain the importance of load forecasting in the power system. [5]

b) Explain classification and characteristics of loads. [10]

c) Explain different approaches to load forecasting. [10]

Q2) a) Explain energy forecasting for the residential, commercial and industrialclass of consumers. [8]

b) Explain long term, medium term and short term planning. [9]

c) Explain the role of power system engineer in short term planning. [8]

Q3) Attempt any two : [25]

a) Explain continuous Markov process.

b) Explain different methods of load forecasting.

c) Describe peak load forecasting and weather load model.

d) Explain two state model of reliability and show that MTTF is reciprocalof failure rate.

P.T.O.

SECTION - II

Q4) a) Explain the concept of Loss of Load Probability (LOLP) with referenceto power system planning. [13]

b) A generating station has four units each of 100 MW capacity and havingFOR of 0.025. Develop capacity outage probability table for this system.

[12]

Q5) a) Write a note on transmission planning. [12]b) Explain different factors to be considered in distribution system Planning.

[13]

Q6) Write short notes on : (Any three) [25]a) Integrated resource planning.

b) Multilevel EHV-AC transmission planning.

c) Factors affecting interconnection under emergency assistance.

d) Interruption indices.

e) Effects of transferring loads on distribution system.

[3765] - 548 -2-


[3765]-550M.E. (Electrical) (Power System)DIGITAL POWER SYSTEM PROTECTION

(2008 Course) (Elective - III)Time : 3 Hours] [Max. Marks : 100Instructions to the candidates :

1) Answer any TWO questions from each section.2) Answers to the two sections should be written in separate books.3) Neat diagrams must be drawn wherever necessary.4) Figures to the right indicate full marks.5) Use of logarithmic tables, slide rule, Mollier charts, electronic pocket

calculator and steam tables is allowed.6) Assume suitable data, if necessary.

SECTION - I

Q1) a) Explain the consequences if a power system is not protected? [8]

b) Bring out the salient features of Digital power system protection in ainterconnected system. [8]

c) Explain least error squared technique using a suitable illustration. [9]

Q2) a) Name the different relays that are used for protection of transmissionline. State their salient features & limitations. [8]

b) Draw and explain block diagram of a complete hardware system fordigital protection of transmission line. Explain function of each block.[8]

c) Give Mathematical theory and principle of digital protection oftransmission line based on fundamental signal. [9]

Q3) a) Explain various faults in synchronous generator. [5]

b) Explain digital protection of synch. generator based upon secondharmonic current injection. [10]

c) Explain digital protection based on injection of subsynchronouscomponent. [10]

SECTION - II

Q4) a) Explain digital protection of transformer using magnetising inrush currentprinciple. [6]

P1743

P.T.O.

b) With a neat diagram explain working of relay which is used to protectpower transformer against incipient faults. [6]

c) In a differential scheme of power transformer explain:

i) Principle of operation.

ii) Reasons for taking high bias factor.

iii) Derivation of Relay characteristics in complex - plane. [13]

Q5) a) Explain : “Relay setting & co-ordination is critical and complex”. [7]

b) With neat diagrams, explain three - stepped distance protection scheme.Using a numerical example and necessary diagram explain effect of over-reach. [12]

c) Explain distance relay three - zone setting. [6]

Q6) a) In ultra high speed protective relays for high voltage long transmissionline, explain travelling wave based relaying scheme. [8]

b) Develop fundamental algorithm for short circuit studies. [8]

c) With reference to (b) above, explain & derive equations for transformationto symmetrical components. [9]

Y

[3765] - 550 2


[3765] - 561M.E. (E & T/C) (Microwave)

SPEECH PROCESSING AND APPLICATION(2008 Revised Course)









P1748

SECTION - I

Q1) a) What is voiced sound? [2]

b) What is voiceless sound? [2]

c) Explain the different places of articulation with respect to consonants ofAmerican English. [8]

d) Explain the term lip rounding with respect to vowels. [3]

e) Explain what are long and short vowels. [3]

Q2) a) Explain the source filter model of speech with a neat diagram. [8]

b) Explain the acoustic characteristics of speech. [8]

Q3) a) What is speech digitization and why it is essential? [4]

b) Draw the speech quality versus bit rate graph for various coding schemes.[6]

c) What is phoneme smoothing? [3]

d) What is intonation? [3]

Q4) a) What is multipulse excited LPC? Draw the block diagram of MLPC andexplain the same. [8]

b) Explain the basic steps in the conversion of text to speech. [8]

P.T.O.

SECTION - II

Q5) a) What are the components of hardware architecture of voice processingsystem? Draw the block diagram of voice processing hardware systemand explain. [9]

b) Compare the standalone versus network controller based voice processingarchitecture. [6]

c) What is Interactive voice Response function? [3]

Q6) a) How spectral distance measures can be used for speech recognition?[6]

b) Explain what is difference spectrum? [4]

c) Explain what is smoothed group delay spectrum. [6]

Q7) a) Explain what is Ensemble Interval Histogram. Draw the block diagram ofthe E

IH computational model of auditory nerve system and explain. [10]

b) Explain any one dynamic programming approach for speech recognition.[6]

Q8) a) Draw the LVQ network used for speech recognition task and explain thesame architecture. [6]

b) What are Hidden Markov models? How it is used for speech recognition?[4]

c) How neural nets and Hidden Markov models can be combined to improvethe speech recognition. [6]

[3765] - 561 -2-


[3765] - 563M.E. (E & TC) (Microwave)

MICROWAVE INTEGRATED CIRCUITS(2008 Course)



1) Solve any Five questions.

2) Figure to right indicates full marks.

3) Assume suitable data whenever necessary.

P1884

Q1) a) Explain, discuss and compare hybrid and monolithic microwaveintegrated circuits. [15]

b) Describe the technological steps involved in the fabrication of hybridhydrid ICs. [5]

Q2) a) A 50Ω microstrip line is to be matched to 100Ω resistive load. Find thewidth and the length of a single section quarter wave transformer. Thedesign employs a 0.025 inch thick Alumina ( r = 9.70) substrate andoperating frequency is 10 GHz. [10]

b) A four port network has the scattering matrix shown below [10]

S[ ]=

0.1∠90o 0.8∠ – 45o 0.3∠ − 45o 0

0.8∠ – 45o 0 0 0.4 ∠ 45o

0.3∠ – 45o 0 0 0.6∠ – 45o

0 0.4 ∠45o 0.6∠ − 45o 0

i) Is this network lossless?ii) Is this network reciprocal?iii) What is the return loss at port 1 when all other ports are terminated

with a matched load?

Q3) a) Draw the layout diagram and the equivalent circuits of the followingmicrostrip Components : [10]i) An equivalent split Wilkinson power divider.ii) An unequivalent split Wilkinson power divider.iii) A quadrature (90o) hybrid branch line coupler.iv) A hybrid or Rat-race in microstrip form.

P.T.O.

b) Design a microstrip line for 100 ohm characteristic impedance. Thesubstrate thickness is 0.158 cm with r = 2.20. What is the guidewavelength on this X-line, if operating frequency is 4.0 GHz. [10]

Q4) a) Define the terms Power gain (G0, Available power gain (G

A) and

transducer power gain (GT) for a two port network. Derive an expression

for the power gain in terms of S-parameters of the two port network andthe reflection coefficients and of the source and load. [10]

b) A Microwave transistor has the following S - parameters at 10 GHz, with50 Ω reference impedance : S11 = 0.45 ∠150o, S12 = 0.01 ∠–10o,S

21 = 2.05 ∠10o, S

22 = 0.4 ∠–150o.

The source impedance is Zs = 20Ω and load impedance Z

L = 30Ω.

Compute the power gain. [10]

Q5) Draw the circuit diagram of a Colpitts oscillator using a common emitter BJTand show that the necessary condition for oscillation is C

2 / C

1 = gm/G

i and

frequency of oscillation is ω0 = 1L3

C1 + C2

C1.C2

[20]

Q6) With the help of schematic diagram describe a two-port Test-Fixture formeasurement of MIC-components. What are its advantages Vis-à-vis probesolution measurement? [20]

Q7) Write short notes on (Any three) : [20]a) GaAs-FET digital attenuator.

b) Various types of integrated circuit antennas and their circuit topologies.

c) Application of MICs in satellite communication systems.

d) Feature trends in MICs.

[3765] - 563 -2-


[3765] - 599M.E. (Electronics) (Digital Systems)

COMMUNICATION NETWORK AND SECURITY(2008 Course) (504202)



1) Answer any three questions from Section I and three questions from Section II.






P1923

SECTION - I

Q1) a) Explain IP spoofing. Where it is used? How to defense against spoofing?[8]

b) Explain the physical layer details of 802.11 wireless protocols. Alsoexplain the concept of Jamming in wireless network. [8]

Q2) a) Compare SSL Vs SET. [8]

b) Classify the routing protocols in mobile adhoc Network. Explain anyone in detail. [8]

Q3) a) Explain the design vulnerabilities of TCP/IP protocol stack in detail. Alsoexplain the attacks possible on TCP/IP stack. [8]

b) Explain the concept of data dissemination and data gathering in WirelessSensor Network (WSN). [8]

Q4) Write short note on any three : [18]

a) IPSec.

b) Secure Electronic Transaction Process.

c) DDoS attack with reflectors.

d) Bluetooth Security.

P.T.O.

SECTION - II

Q5) a) Explain the “Digital Signature” implementation for “Non-Repudiation”service Property. [8]

b) What are the different security features offered by PGP? Write down thevarious PGP operation steps and explain it briefly. [8]

Q6) a) Explain AES algorithm in detail and compare with DES algo. [8]

b) Explain RSA algorithm in detail and compare with Diffie-Hellman algo.[8]

Q7) a) Explain the AAA service properties with suitable example. [8]

b) Explain IDEA symmetric key algorithm briefly and list the applications.[8]

Q8) Write short note on any three : [18]

a) HMAC.

b) Types of Attacks.

c) Asynchronous Transfer Mode architecture.

d) Sensor management in WSN.

[3765] - 599 -2-


[3765]-603M.E. (Electronics - Digital System)EMBEDDED VIDEO PROCESSING

(2008 Course) (Elective - III)Time : 3 Hours] [Max. Marks : 100Instructions to the candidates :

1) Answer any THREE questions from each section.2) Answers to the two sections should be written in separate books.3) Neat diagrams must be drawn wherever necessary.4) Figures to the right indicate full marks.5) Use of electronic pocket calculator is allowed.6) Assume suitable data, if necessary.

SECTION - I

Q1) a) Explain the different methods to measure the quality of video. Justifywhich method is commonly used in practical applications. [8]

b) Explain in brief:

i) HVS Model. ii) Different color spaces. [8]

Q2) a) Explain in detail Huffman coding of quantized DCT coefficients inbaseline JPEG. Also comment on compression efficiency of it. [8]

b) Output of a discrete memory-less source consists of three letters X, Y &Z with probabilities 0.4, 0.35 & 0.25 respectively. Estimate Huffmancode & coding efficiency for -

i) Single letter is considered for coding.

ii) A pair of letters is considered for coding. Comment on result. [8]

Q3) a) Draw & explain block diagram of H.261 Encoder / Decoder. [8]

b) What are the QoS requirements for coded video? [5]

c) Compare H.261 with H.263. [5]

Q4) a) Discuss the different types of pictures defined in MPEG - 1 standard fortrade off between coding efficiency & random access. [8]

b) With proper expressions, compare the three criteria functions like ‘MAD,PDC & BPM’ deployed in motion vector computation. [8]

P1754

P.T.O.

SECTION - II

Q5) a) State the different requirements for motion estimation & compensation.[5]

b) State & explain the different techniques of prediction. [5]

c) Justify - Fast search algorithms gives poorer compression performancethan full search algorithms. [5]

d) A frame in HDTV has resolution of 1920 x 1152 with typical frame rateof PAL system. Calculate the computational complexity for motionestimation when full search & two dimensional logarithm searchalgorithms are employed. [3]

Q6) a) What is the need of pre - and post - processing? Also explain how thenoise due to camera movement and camera noise is filtered by pre-filtering process. [8]

b) With reference to MPEG standard, draw & explain the basic video coder& decoder showing intra & inter frame coding. [8]

Q7) a) Explain the procedure to test the different blocks of hardware CODEC.[8]

b) What are the advantages of shifting the paradigm from ‘frame’ in MPEG- 1/2 to ‘objects’ in MPEG - 4? Explain the concept of video object, videoobject plane & shape / motion / texture coding in the MPEG - 4 standard.

[8]

Q8) Write detailed notes on- [16]

a) Arithmetic coding.

b) JPEG - 2000.

c) Video codec interface.

d) Embedded processor.

Y

[3765] - 603 2


[3765] - 61M.E. (Mechanical - Design Engineering)

DESIGN ENGINEERING(2002 Course)








6) Use of pocket non programmable electronic calculator is allowed.

P1646

SECTION - I

Q1) a) What do you understand by ramp of cam? How is it taken into accountwhile designing the cam profile? [6]

b) Discuss methods and various geometric properties to be considered whilemachining cams. [6]

c) How elasticity affects accuracy of cam? [6]

Q2) a) What is stress relaxation? What is its importance in engineering field?Explain it with the help of stress relaxation curve. [6]

b) What is adequate design? State its application. [4]

c) What do you understand by the term sequential analysis, Reliability &Maintainability. [6]

Q3) a) What are different factors affecting the creep strength? [8]

b) Following creep data is known at certain temperature. [8]

S1 = 12 MPa ∈1 = 0.01% per 1000 hrs.

S2 = 25 MPa ∈2 = 0.02% per 1000 hrs.

termine constants of exponential creep law and also the creep rate forstress 35 MPa.

P.T.O.

Q4) a) Explain Weibull frequency distribution with the help of plot. [5]b) What do you understand by total quality control? [5]c) What is the relation between the probability of survival and factor of

safety? [6]

Q5) Write short notes on (Any Two) : [16]a) Cylindrical rubber spring.

b) Ergonomics considerations of man-machine system.

c) Multifunctional Optimization.

d) Creep Resistant Alloys.

SECTION - II

Q6) a) Explain the term hypothesis testing, Analysis of variance & Confidencelevel. [4]

b) Following table gives the data obtained from set of experiments to findthe effect of screwing conditions on the particles produced in a vesselthat is expected to be clean. Carry out an analysis to find if any of theprocesses is significantly different from the others. [12]Lubrications No Lubrication Lubricated

Screwing speed Exp. 1 Exp. 2 Exp. 3 Exp. 4

Normal 145 145 131 113

Slow 83 73 63 111

Q7) a) Write the design considerations of torsion bar spring? Give applicationof the spring. [6]

b) A helical compression spring made of No. 4 music wire under fluctuatingload. The spring index is 6 and the factor of safety is 1.5. If the averageload on the spring is 550 N, find the Permissible values for the maximumand minimum loads. Use the Data

i) No. 4 music wire d = 5.72 mm,

ii) No. 5 music wire d = 5.4 mm,

iii) Ultimate tensile strength – 1700 MPa,

iv) Yield strength in shear 680 MPa,

v) Endurance limit to shear = 375 MPa. [10]

[3765] - 61 -2-

Q8) a) Laminated composite material has a fracture toughness of K1c = 35 MPa√mand tensile strength of 500 MPa. A 25 mm width structural element madefrom this material has an edge crack of length of 3 mm. [10]i) Find the critical stress that would cause unstable propagation of the

crack,

ii) For the geometrics of this specimen stress intensity factor

Klc = σ√πa f(a/b) where f(a/b) = 1.12 - 0.231(a/b) + 10.55(a/b)2.

b) Explain the following terms [6]i) Stress Intensity Factor.

ii) Fracture Toughness

iii) Critical crack length.

Q9) a) What design criteria are to be used while designing a helical Gear underfluctuating stress? [8]

b) What is meant by “STUB GEAR”? Why stubbing is needed? Explainwith suitable diagram. [8]

Q10)Write short notes on (Any Two) : [18]a) Applications of Fiber Reinforced Polymers.

b) Constraints minimization techniques.

c) Different methods of optimization.

d) Design for Manufacturing and Assembly.

[3765] - 61 -3-


[3765] - 614M.E. (Production)

ADVANCED ROBOTICS(Revised Course 2008)







5) Use of calculators is allowed.


P1758

SECTION - I

Q1) a) Explain the term “Automation”. What are its types? How are robots usefulin automation? [8]

b) Classify robots on the basis of structural configuration. Sketch workvolumes of four basic types of robots. [8]

Q2) a) For a pick and place type of robot, the gripper is initially at location(70, 40, 60) and the following movements are executed in sequence.[8]

i) Rotation about Z by 45o.

ii) Rotation about new X by 90o.

iii) Translation along new Z by 30 units.

Find the position of gripper with respect to the original system by usingtransformation matrix method.

b) For a pick and place robot the link parameters are [8]

No. iJoint αi−1 ai–1 d

i θi

1 1 0 0 0 30o

2 2 –90o 0 2 0

3 3 0 7 0 30o

4 4 90o 0 0 45o

Determine location of frame (4) assuming as gripper end with respect tothe base at origin.

P.T.O.

Q3) a) What are the functions of machine vision system used in robots? What isthe number of quantization level in A/D converter if n is the number ofbits? [8]

b) Describe [8]

i) Touch sensors.

ii) Force sensors.

Q4) a) Find the worst spatial resolution of a sperical robot with 500 mm armlength. The robot is equipped with 3 encoders emitting 1200 pulses perrevolution. The linear axis is actuated with aid of 200 mm pitch leadscrew having the encoder mounted on it. [8]

b) Describe position sensors used for controlling position of the arm. [8]

Q5) Write short notes on any three : [18]a) Different robot generations.

b) Mechanical grippers.

c) Denavit - Hartanberg conventions.

d) Contour path for cubic fit.

SECTION - II

Q6) a) An 8 x 8 gray level in age with 16 gray level intensity value is givenbelow : construct histogram of image and obtain threshold value. Convertimage into a binary (black & white) image. [8]

6 4 0 1 2 4 3 5

3 13 13 14 13 11 13 3

4 8 10 13 14 10 11 4

3 4 7 13 14 4 2 2

5 5 3 14 13 5 0 6

5 10 13 15 14 14 12 3

5 12 14 13 11 10 9 2

2 4 5 5 5 4 8 4

b) Describe a typical d.c.servo motor used in robots. How is its torque speedcharacteristics? [8]

[3765] - 614 -2-

Q7) a) Explain WAIT, DELAY & SIGNAL commands. [8]b) Explain the program & its output [8]

SIGNAL 5SPEED 40, IPSOPEN 100APPRO P1, 50SPEED 10, IPSMOVE P1GRASP 10, 100DEPART P1, 50SPEED 40, IPSMOVE P2BELOWOPEN 100STOP.

Q8) a) Define the term “Artificial Intelligence”. Speculate role of AI techniquesin applications in industry. [8]

b) Describe in details, applications of mobile robots. [8]

Q9) a) Justify the social, economic factors associated with the use of robots. [8]b) Describe robots that are remotely controlled. Detail on various areas where

such robots can be used. [8]

Q10)Write short notes on any three : [18]a) Robots in inspection & welding.

b) Robots in space.

c) Interfacing robot with PC.

d) Safety in robots.

e) Robots in assembly.

[3765] - 614 -3-


[3765]-619M.E. (Production)

MANUFACTURING MANAGEMENT(Revised 2008 Course)


Instructions to the candidates:1) Answer any 3 questions from each section.2) Answers to the two sections should be written in separate answer books.3) Neat diagrams must be drawn wherever necessary.4) Figures to the right indicate full marks.5) Use of pocket calculator is allowed.6) Assume suitable data, if necessary.7) Your answers will be evaluated as a whole.

P1760

P.T.O.

SECTION - I

Q1) a) What is the importance of manufacturing excellence in world classmanufacturing? [8]

b) Explain the contributions of Quality gurus towards improvement ofquality in manufacturing. [8]

Q2) a) Explain the relationship of manufacturing function with other functionaldepartments in an organization. [8]

b) A small project is composed of activities whose time estimates arelisted in the table below. [8]

ActivityEstimated duration (days) Immediate

Optimistic Most likely Pessimistic Predecessors

A 3 6 9 —B 2 5 8 —C 2 4 6 AD 2 3 10 BE 1 3 11 BF 4 6 8 C, DG 1 5 15 E, F

[3765]-619 - 2 -

i) Draw the project network.

ii) Find the expected duration and variance for each activity. What isthe expected project length?

iii) What is the probability that the project will be completed by 18weeks? (Z

1.146 = 37.41)

Q3) a) Explain the 7 wastes identified in Toyota Production Systems. [8]

b) “World Class manufacturing greatly helps in formulating the desiredfuture”. Comment by relating it to the importance of vision, missionand goals of the organization. [8]

Q4) Write short notes on Any Three: [18]

a) Lean and agile manufacturing.

b) Value stream mapping.

c) Project management as a tool.

d) Functions in PPC.

e) Manufacturing scheduling.

f) Contributions of Prof. C.K. Pralhad.

SECTION - II

Q5) a) What are the contributions of Hawthorne studies in the organizationalbehaviour? [8]

b) What are the four major dimentions of the MBTI (Mayers-Briggs-Type Indicator) that yield the 16 types? How can MBTI be usedeffectively? [8]

Q6) a) Explain theory of X and theory of Y. What is its significance? [8]

b) Explain any two theories of Motivation. Still why these theories cannotmotivate more people? [8]

Q7) a) What are the causes of conflicts? What are the tools & stages used toresolve them? [8]

b) “In the team environments, it takes longer to get tasks done”. Is this animportant consideration in determining whether or not a team approachis effective? Why or why not? [8]

Q8) Write short notes on any THREE : [18]

a) The Gallup path.

b) Job satisfaction.

c) Theories of leadership styles.

d) Future of organization behaviour.

e) Contributions of Lilian Gilbreth.

[3765]-619 - 3 -


[3765]-630M.E. (Computer)

EMERGING TRENDS IN COMPUTER ARCHITECTURE(510102) (2008 Course)


Instructions to the candidates:1) Answer any 3 questions from each section.2) Answers to the two sections should be written in separate books.3) Neat diagrams must be drawn wherever necessary.4) Figures to the right indicate full marks.5) Assume suitable data, if necessary.

P1762

P.T.O.

SECTION - I

Q1) a) What are advantages and disadvantages of Blade Server? [8]

b) What do you mean by Cluster? What are challenges of Clustering?Describe COW’s and NOW’s. [8]

Q2) a) Discuss features of Quadrinet System Interconnection Network. [8]

b) Explain ATM Technology principle and Architecture. Discuss cellswitch design with respect to same. [8]

Q3) a) Draw the Internal Block diagram of IBM Power IV and list its salientfeatures. [8]

b) What is Basic Concept of Multithreading? Explain MultithreadedArchitectures and its Computational Model for Parallel ProcessingSystem. [8]

Q4) Write Short notes on: [18]

a) Cluster Monitoring and Management Tools.

b) PARAM net (CDAC).

c) TCP/IP Protocol Suit.

[3765]-630 - 2 -

SECTION - II

Q5) a) Discuss advantages and technologies of Network AttachedStorage. [8]

b) Explain the Typical SAN Architecture along with a SuitableApplication. [8]

Q6) a) Discuss ARCC Grid computing model. [8]

b) What advantages of Grid is computing over Cluster Computing? Whatare Grid Architecture Considerations? [8]

Q7) a) How P-threads act as a Programming Interfaces for ParallelProgramming? [8]

b) What are Thread Synchronization mechanisms? Compare PVM andMPI . [8]

Q8) Write Short notes on: [18]

a) Grid Architecture Model.

b) Compilation Phases in Parallel Code Generation.

c) Features of Parallel Programming Languages.


[3765] - 631M.E. (Computer Engineering and Computer Network)

PRINCIPLES AND PRACTICES FOR IT MANAGEMENT(2008 Course) (510103)








P1943

SECTION - I

Q1) Write short notes on any three of the following : [18]

a) Business philosophy and Management Style.

b) Business Ethics.

c) Importance of Formal and Informal Groups.

d) Important provisions of IPR.

e) Logistics Management and Business Growth.

Q2) a) Explain in brief different functions of Management and their importance.[8]

b) What do you mean by the term ‘Strategic Management’? How does itdiffer from day to day management. [8]

Q3) a) Discuss the steps involved in preliminary planning of an IT business.[8]

b) Explain in brief the importance of Conflict Management for a businessorganization. [8]

Q4) a) Differentiate the Supply Chain Management for FMCG sector and ITsector. [8]

b) Which factors will you consider for calculating Customer SatisfactionIndex for an IT organization? Mention these according to their importancewith brief description. [8]

P.T.O.

Q5) a) Assuming that you are budgeting an IP project, enumerate the importantfactors which need to be considered, with brief explanation. [8]

b) How can ‘Risk Management’ be taken care of in IT project? [8]

SECTION - II

Q6) You are the IT project Manager of a network upgrade project. Your Lab consistof 256 work station. You have to establish a new WiFi lab. We have threeaccess points. You have to set up the lab in a glass circular building. (Approx.5 km rad.) Total new 100 terminals with same configuration with additionalwireless port you have to add. Additionally you required one wired networkwith 50 terminal from same gate way.

(Assume additional technical information if needed related to project.)

a) Write SRS report with standard format for above project.

b) Create Work Breakdown structure with prope information. Set suitablequestions to write information. [18]

Q7) a) Scenario : You are the sales Manager. You are working with Mr. Pandit,an IT project Manager, on new sales automation. Requirements are asfollows :

i) Contact Management features.

ii) Database searchable by property.

iii) Ability to block sales people from viewing records they did notenter.

iv) Ability for the sales manager to relocate leads to sales reps.

v) Ability to download contact request on the PDA.

vi) Fax and Email ability.

Suggest any four change request (Those can be approved). Document itin the Proper change request form. [8]

b) What is the definition of Total Quality Management? What is ContinuousQuality Management. [8]

Q8) a) What are attributes of a good project manager in regard to leading ateam? How does she will lead a team when project is consistently goingaway. [8]

b) What is a Post - Project Audit what is it’s significance? [8]

[3765] - 631 -2-

Q9) From the customer survey you are decided to upgrade your Company website,(company is involved in developing customized software solutions for LifeInsurance Companies. (Main Customers will be Policy Developers. End userswill be Policy holders).

a) Generate and refine Preliminary Project concept and scope statement.

b) Decide business need and feasibility of the project.

c) Write down the project proposal for approval. [16]

Q10)a) What are challenges of planning a short-term project? [4]

b) What methods can a project manager use to inspire a team to performunder a tight project deadline? [6]

c) What is the difficult part of planning long term project? [6]

[3765] - 631 -3-


[3765] - 639M.E. (Computer)

EMBEDDED SYSTEM DESIGN(2008 Course) (510105)



1) Questions 1 and 5 are compulsory. Attempt any two questions from questions2 to 4 in Section I and Attempt any two questions from questions 6 to 8 inSection II.





P1767

SECTION - I

Q1) a) What are the different classifications of embedded systems? Explain. [8]

b) Explain interrupt handling in ARM7. [8]

Q2) a) Give brief overview of intel Xscale architecture. [8]

b) Name and explain low power management modes of Bluetooth. [8]

Q3) a) What are the different packets used for bus transaction in USB? Alsoexplain types of data transfers supported by USB protocol. [10]

b) Explain START and STOP conditions of I2C. Also explain how bit transfertakes place in I2C. [8]

Q4) a) What is PCI? Explain. [6]

b) Given : A microcontroller has 8 channel on chip 10-bit ADC. Three inputchannels of ADC, namely AIN0, AIN1 and AIN2 are used for anapplication. Write pseudo code to configure and read the digital outputsfrom these analog inputs. The digital output is available in ADDR registerand configuration can be done using ADCR register. [10]

P.T.O.

SECTION - II

Q5) a) Compare Bluetooth protocol, 802.11 and IrDA w.r.t. following features.

i) Technology.

ii) Distance.

iii) Security.

iv) Cost.

v) Data Rate. [10]

b) Differentiate between 802.11 and 802.15. [6]

Q6) a) With the help of neat diagram, explain the structure of FPGA. [8]

b) What are macrocells? Which devices use these as building blocks? Explainin detail. [8]

Q7) a) What are cross compilers? When do you use them? How they are differentthan compilers? [6]

b) What are the disadvantages of using Java for Embedded systemprogramming? [6]

c) What are the different criteria, based on which RTOS is selected for anembedded system application? [6]

Q8) a) Which are different scheduling algorithms used in RTOS? [6]

b) What do you mean by pipes, queues and sockets? [6]

c) VxWorks, QNX, WINCE and RTLINUX. Categorize these under softRTOS or hard RTOS. [4]

[3765] - 639 -2-


[3765]-641M.E. (Computer / Computer Networking)

HIGH PERFORMANCE DATABASE SYSTEMS(2008 Course)



P1768

P.T.O.

SECTION - I

Q1) a) How does a TP monitor manage processes, messaging &communications? [5]

b) Explain in a sentence or two roles of processes like process monitor,Lock manager, check point & Log writes & database writes. [5]

c) Explain object Transaction Management in detail. [5]

d) Why was the TPC-D benchmark replaced by TPC-H and TPC-Rbenchmarks? [3]

Q2) a) Explain in detail distributed Query processing with an example. [8]

b) Describe cost based and Heuristic query optimization techniques. [8]

Q3) a) Draw a wait-for Graph indicating a deadlock. Explain three actionsthat need to be taken for recovery from deadlock. Also explain anyone method for dealing with deadlock in a distributed system. [8]

b) Discuss ACID properties and explain in detail flat transaction and Nestedtransaction. [8]

[3765]-641 - 2 -

Q4) a) How 3 PC protocol responds to various types of failures. [6]

b) Explain the following terms: [10]

i) Scope of reference, Reference types instead of triggers.

ii) SQL 3, SQL 2006 XML Integration.

SECTION - II

Q5) a) Discuss the functionalities of Data Ware housing and List down thedifficulties in implementing it. [6]

b) Explain how OLAP operational characteristics can be divided intothree main modules. [6]

c) Design a Snowflake schema for Clinical Information System. [6]

Q6) a) Following transaction Id Items are given: [8]

T01 X, Z

T02 U, V, W, X, Y, Z

T03 U, W, Y

T04 V, X, Z

T05 U, Y

T06 W, X, Y

T07 X, Y, Z

T08 U, Z

T09 V, Y

T10 V, W, X

Using above data, for each of the rules given below compute Supportand Confidence.

V → W

X → Z

U → Y

Z → V

W → U

Y → X

b) Clustering can be performed on nominal data. How does this works?What are the inputs and outputs? In what way is clustering with nominaldata similar to text mining? [8]

Q7) a) Consider the following Table :

NAME GENDER HEIGHT OUTPUT

Kavita F 1.6 Meter Short

Jayesh M 2 Meter Tall

Mani F 1.9 Meter Medium

Martha F 1.88 Meter Medium

Jayeshri F 1.7 Meter Short

Banu M 1.85 Meter Medium

Karuna F 1.6 Meter Short

Dave M 1.7 Meter Short

Pinto M 2.2 Meter Tall

Babloo M 2.1 Meter Tall

Debbie F 1.8 Meter Medium

Arun M 1.95 Meter Medium

Aishwarya F 1.9 Meter Medium

Eunice F 1.8 Meter Medium

Reva F 1.75 Meter Medium

To facilitate classification, divide the height into six ranges(0, 1.6), (1.6, 1.7), (1.7, 1.8), (1.8, 1.9), (1.9, 2.0), (2.1, ∞)

Now compute the following: [8]

i) Probability associated with the attributes.

ii) Estimate Prior Probability.

iii) Classify new tuple t = < Ramesh, M, 1.96 Meter > and computeactual probability of each event.

b) How does warehouse allow the precomputation and fast accessing ofsummarized data? [8]

[3765]-641 - 3 -

Q8) Write short notes on: [16]

a) Main-Memory Database Optimizations.

b) ETL process.

c) LDAP.

d) Deductive Databases.

[3765]-641 - 4 -



PATTERN RECOGNITION & MACHINE VISION

(2008 Course) (510111B)







SECTION - I

Q1) a) Discuss Maximum Likelihood approach used for parameter estimation.[8]

b) What is the use of PCA? Explain how PCA can be used for representingN-dimensional samples by a single vector. [8]

Q2) a) Define Parzen window function and discuss Kernel-based methods forprobability density estimation. [8]

b) Explain in detail Bayesian estimation technique for calculating aposteriori density and the desired probability density. [10]

Q3) a) Define the LMS rule and discuss the LMS procedure for multi - categorypattern classification. [8]

b) Discuss Fisher Linear Discriminant analysis for the problem of projectingdata samples from d-dimensions onto a line. [8]

Q4) a) Explain the algebraic approach to the problem of estimating projectiveshape of a scene. [8]

b) With algorithm discuss the Tomasi - Kanade Factorization algorithm foraffine shape from motion. [8]

P1769

P.T.O.

SECTION - II

Q5) a) Write and explain the EM (Expectation Maximization) algorithm forimage segmentation. [10]

b) Explain the use of Fundamental Matrix in projective motion estimation.[8]

Q6) What is tracking? What are its applications? With algorithm discuss the useof Kalman Filtering in tracking. [16]

Q7) a) What is stereopsis? Discuss correlation method used for stereo matching.[8]

b) Discuss stereo data fusion and reconstruction process of stereo vision,in brief. [8]

Q8) a) What is the use of geometric hashing in object Recognition? Explainwith one example. [8]

b) What is pattern clustering? How it differs from classification? Discussin brief, one problem of object Recognition using linear combination ofviews. [8]

Y

[3765] - 644 2



ADVANCED INTERNET PROGRAMMING

(2008 Course) (510111D)



1) Answer 3 questions from Section I and 3 questions from Section II.




SECTION - I

Q1) a) What are the core concepts of JMS API? What is the point to pointcommunication model and the publish and subscribe communicationmodel?

b) Explain the role of the following elements of a JMS API:

i) Connection factories. ii) Connections.

iii) Sessions. iv) Messages.

v) Destinations. vi) Message producers and

vii) Message consumers.

[16]

Q2) a) There are a variety of node types in the DOM that represent differenttypes of elements within an XML document. Using these key nodes showhow a DOM tree actually maps into a typical XML document.

b) Using a suitable example illustrate how the API for transformation inJAXP can be used to transform an XML file using an XSL transformationfile.

[16]

Q3) a) Draw a schematic showing the EJB framework and explain the roles ofits major components.

P1770

P.T.O.

b) What are the different types of EJBs and what are their specialities?

c) State in brief the process of developing and deploying EJB components.

[16]

Q4) Write short notes on any TWO of the following: [18]

a) BEA Weblogic server. b) JBOSS.

c) JNDI.

SECTION - II

Q5) a) What is the basic objective of the servlet API?

b) Show the life cycle of a servlet explaining the roles of the servlet andservlet engine.

c) Write suitable code skeleton to illustrate the actions of a mail client tosend new messages, read the messages and search for a message. Makeuse of the EJBs.

[16]

Q6) Write short notes on any TWO of the following: [18]

a) RMI in Java.

b) JDBC.

c) Internationalization and localization.

Q7) a) What is the role of the Struts framework in designing Java applications?

b) Give an over view of the IBM servlet API.

c) Explain the MVC design pattern.

[16]

Q8) Write suitable code skeleton for the following: [16]

a) Access LDAP server using JNDI from Java.

b) Populate the LDAP server with suitable data. Highlight important clauses,interfaces, constructors, methods and packages.

Y[3765] - 646 2


[3765] - 651M.E. (Computer)

WIRELESS TECHNOLOGY(Computer Networking)

(Elective - II) (2008 Course) (510305) (Theory)Time : 3 Hours] [Max. Marks : 100

Instructions to the candidates:1) Answer any 3 questions from Section I and 3 questions from Section II.2) Answers to the two sections should be written in separate answer books.3) Neat diagrams must be drawn wherever necessary.4) Figures to the right indicate full marks.5) Assume suitable data, if necessary.

P1772

SECTION - I

Q1) a) Discuss different types of communications media being used today. Statethe characteristics of these media.

b) Discuss the two categories of communication viz. analog and digitalstating the advantages and disadvantages of each type.

[16]

Q2) With the help of a suitable diagram show various function blocks and theirinterconnections in a GSM architecture. State what are the major interfaces andprotocols used and the functions of various elements of the network. [16]

Q3) Write short notes on any TWO of the following : [18]

a) Tunelling and reverse tunneling in mobile node.

b) FTP over Bluetooth.

c) Enterprise Authentication Protocol.

Q4) a) State and explain the various network services provided by 802.11network.

b) With reference to 802.11 explain the terms :

i) Independent Base Service Set.

ii) Infrastructure BSS. [16]

P.T.O.

SECTION - II

Q5) a) State what is the relationship between the transmitted power Pi and thereceived power Pr in free space. Assume the following :

i) Gt and Gr are the transmitter and receiver antenna gains respectivelyin the direction from the transmitter to the receiver.

ii) d is the distance between the transmitter and the receiver.

iii) lambda = c / f is the wavelength of the carrier. ‘c’ is the speed oflight in free space and f is the frequency of the radio carrier.

b) i) What is the received power (in dB m) in the free space of a signalwhose transmit power is 1 W and carrier frequency is 2.4 GHz ifthe receiver is at a distance of 1 mile (1.6 km) from the transmitter?Assume that the transmitter and receiver antennas gains are 1.6.

ii) What is the path loss in dB?

iii) What is the transmission delay in milliseconds?

[18]

Q6) Write short notes on any TWO of the following : [16]

a) Frequency translation.

b) CSMA / CA.

c) Wi-Max.

Q7) a) Draw a diagram showing WEP operations which handle confidentialityand integrity simultaneously. State what is meant by integrity check value.

b) State any four prominent design flaws in WEP. [16]

Q8) a) What are the access mechanisms that support contention and contention-free access in IEEE 802.11? State the roles of different inter-framespacings (IFSs) between the transmission of packets in assigning priorityin MAC?

b) Describe the PCF mechanism in 802.11 MAC sub-layer. [16]

[3765] - 651 -2-


[3765] - 654M.E. (Computer Networking)NETWORK PROGRAMMING(Elective - III(A)) (2008 Course)







P1775

SECTION - I

Q1) a) Write a concurrent server program which uses TCP and show the statusof client and server before call to fork, after fork and after socket closingby parent and child. [10]

b) How TCP_NODELAY option is used while sending small packet? [6]

Q2) a) Write a program that uses raw sockets for handling ICMP messages. [10]

b) Explain various TCP socket options. [6]

Q3) a) Explain with the help of psudocode, how IPV6 client communicate withIPV4 server. [10]

b) Explain the following terms with the help of function and parameterdescriptor [6]i) IPV4 socket address structure.ii) Listen function.iii) recv from function.

Q4) a) Draw the argument of clients resolvers & name server in DNS. Explainthe day time client program using gethost by name( ) and get server byname ( ) function, using suitable psudocode. [10]

b) Explain how, when and why a client that wants to access a site in remoteserver would access the DNS? [8]

P.T.O.

SECTION - II

Q5) a) Compare and contrast unicasting, broadcasting and multicasting in LANand WAN. [10]

b) What are multicast socket options? Explain. [6]

Q6) a) Explain the IPV6 address testing macros with the help of suitablepsudocode. [10]

b) What is SNTP? Explain various primitives with suitable example. [6]

Q7) a) Write a TCP based echo server. Test its functionility with an echo clientto calculate the RTT between the client and server. [10]

b) What is TCP’s 3 way handshake? With the help of Scenario explain theTCP connection establishment and termination connection. [6]

Q8) Write short notes on : [18]a) Raw socket creation and its uses.

b) TCP preforked server.

c) Sockets in Data link.

d) Web client and simultaneous connections.

[3765] - 654 -2-


[3765] - 660M.E. (Chemical)

ADVANCED SEPARATION PROCESSES(2008 Course)









P1945

SECTION - I

Q1) a) Explain cross-flow filtration. What are its advantages over dead-endfiltration? [6]

b) What are the different regimes in surface based solid-liquid separationsinvolving a second liquid? [6]

c) Explain adsorption at the bubble surface & the factors affecting thisadsorption. [6]

Q2) a) Explain the Thermal Diffusion Column operation. [8]

b) Explain the principles of dielectrophoresis & give its applications. [8]

Q3) a) Describe the process design considerations for adsorption in compoundsize beds & compound type beds. [8]

b) Explain the non-isothermal effects in adsorption. [8]

Q4) a) What are counterions in Ion-exchange chromatography? Explain swellingin resins & its function. [8]

b) Discuss the operation of dual function filter. [8]

P.T.O.

SECTION - II

Q5) a) How does fouling occur in membranes? [4]

b) Osmotic pressure is to be calculated for three different solutions at 25oC.

i) A salt solution having a concentration of 3.5% by wt. of salt.Molecular weight of salt 60.5.

ii) A solution of an organic compound (having a molecular weight of40,000) containing 3.5 wt % of the organic compound?

iii) A suspension containing 35 gms/l of solid with 1 ng as particleweight. [10]

c) List the various types of driving forces in membrane separations & explainthem briefly. [4]

Q6) a) Explain reverse osmosis in detail & give one application. [8]

b) What are non-porous membranes? Explain gas separation in them. [8]

Q7) a) Discuss the kinetics associated with crystallization. [6]

b) Differentiate between solution & melt crystallization. [6]

c) Discuss the term layer growth & steps involved in it. [4]

Q8) a) Explain dialysis & give its applications & flux equations. [8]

b) What is meant by interaction between solute & membrane? In whichprocess is it observed? [4]

c) Describe any one membrane module used in practice. [4]

[3765] - 660 -2-


[3765] - 665M.E. (Chemical)

INDUSTRIAL POLLUTION CONTROL(Elective - II) (2008 Course)









P1778

SECTION - I

Q1) a) With a neat sketch explain the relationship of ambient lapse rates to thedry adiabatic rate. [6]

b) Calculate the effective height of a stack with the help of following datai) Physical stack is 203 m tall with 1.07 m ID.ii) Wind velocity is 3.56 m/s.iii) Air temperature is 13oC.iv) Barometric pressure 1000 millibars.v) Stack gas velocity is 9.14 m/s and stack gas temperature is 149oC.

[6]c) Write a note on carbon cycle. [6]

Q2) a) With neat sketches explain the mechanism of inertial impaction, directinterception and diffusion. [6]

b) An air stream with a flowrate of 7 m3/s is passed through a cyclone ofstandard proportions. The diameter of the cyclone is 2.0 m and the airtemperature is 77oC. [10]i) Determine the relative particle size (d/d50) for a particle density of

1500 kg/m3 and a diameter of 10 µ m.ii) Determine the relative particle size if a bank of 64 cyclones with a

diameters of 24 cm are used instead of the single large unit.No. of effective turns within a cyclone is 5. At 77oC, the viscosity is2.1 x 10–5 kg/m.s.

P.T.O.

Q3) Explain in brief the pollution caused due to pulp and paper industry and discussthe various methods and equipments which can be used for controlling thesame. [16]

Q4) a) Explain the elements of conceptual process design for a wastewatertreatment plant. [7]

b) Derive an equation for finding the concentration of microorganisms inthe effluent in a complete mix reactor without recycle. [9]

SECTION - II

Q5) a) A settling analysis performed on a dilute suspension of discrete particlesyields the following data which are recorded for samples collected at thedepth of 1m in a batch sedimentation unit.Settling time 0.5 1.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0minWeight fraction 0.53 0.48 0.39 0.21 0.06 0.02remainingDetermine the percent removal of suspended solids in an ideal horizontalflow sedimentation tank operating at (1.2 m3/min) / m3. [10]

b) Write a note on phases of bacterial growth in a biological treatment plant.[6]

Q6) An activated sludge system is to be designed for secondary treatment of10,000 m3/d of municipal wastewater. After primary clarification, the BOD is150 mg/L and it is desired to have not more than 5 mg/L of soluble BOD in theeffluent. A completely mixed reactor is to be used and pilot-plant analysis hasestablished the following kinetic values - Y = 0.5 kg/kg, kd = 0.05 d–1. Assumingan MLSS concentration of 3,000 mg/L and an underflow concentration of10,000 mg/L from the secondary clarifier, determine [16]a) The volume of the reactor.b) The mass and volume of solids that must be wasted each day.c) The recycle ratio.

Q7) a) Explain the phenomena of bulking in activated sludge process. [6]b) Explain various methods of land filling. [10]

Q8) a) Write a note on waste management hierarchy. [6]b) What are the physical properties of a solid waste? Explain those in detail.[7]c) Explain the concept of waste minimisation. [5]

[3765] - 665 -2-


[3765] - 668M.E. (Chemical Engineering)

FLUIDIZATION ENGINEERING(2008 Course)







P1779

SECTION - I

Q1) a) Define fluidization and give the characterization and classification ofFluidization. [8]

b) Discuss the pressure drop across the fluidized column versus fluid velocity.Draw a neat sketch. [8]

Q2) a) What are the applications of fluidization system? [8]

b) Discuss the operating models for fluidization system. [8]

Q3) What are the different flow models? Discuss the generalized Wake model andDavidson model. [18]

Q4) Explain the following in details : [16]a) Mixing-segregation equilibrium.b) Generalized fluidization of poly-dispersed systems.

SECTION - II

Q5) a) Derive the equation for minimum fluidization velocity. [9]b) A fluidized bed consisting spherical particles of diameter 1.5 mm and

density 1500 kg/m3 is fluidized by fluid. The density of fluid is900 kg/m3 and viscosity 1 mN-s/m2. The fractional voidage is 0.5.Determine the minimum fluidization velocity of fluid. [9]

P.T.O.

Q6) Discuss the following in details and write all necessary equations; [16]a) Liquid-solid mass transfer in fluidization.b) Immersed vertical cylinder-to-bed heat transfer.

Q7) Derive the kinetic model for conversion of shrinking and growing particle influidization. [16]

Q8) Write short notes on : [16]a) Conical Fluidized bed.

b) Geldart’s classification for power assessment.

[3765] - 668 -2-


[3765]-691M.E. (Petroleum)

ARTIFICIAL LIFT TECHNIQUES(2008 New Course) (512111) (Elective - III(a))


1) Answers to the two sections must be written in separate answer books.2) Answer two questions from each section.3) Figures to the right indicate full marks.4) Neat diagrams should be drawn wherever necessary.5) Use of a non-programmable calculator is allowed.6) Assume suitable data, if necessary and clearly state it.

SECTION - I

Q1) Explain in detail sand control Operations. [25]

Q2) Draw the IPR, Outflow Performance and Tubing in-take Curves and explainin detail. [25]

Q3) What is Gas lift? Explain with suitable diagrams the different methods andthe types of valves used. [25]

SECTION - II

Q4) Explain the design of an SRP. [25]

Q5) Explain Acidizing and acid fracturing. [25]

Q6) Explain Nodal analysis. [25]

Y

P1788


[3765]-707M.E. CSE (IT)

ADVANCED TRENDS IN DATABASE SYSTEM(514409) (2008 Course)


Instructions to the candidates:1) Answer any 3 questions from each section.2) Answers to the two sections should be written in separate books.3) Neat diagrams must be drawn wherever necessary.

P1793

P.T.O.

SECTION - I

Q1) a) What are the components of a distributed database system? Explainwith a diagram. [8]

b) Explain how replication and fragmentation is used for implementing adistributed database system? [8]

Q2) a) List all the major activities that are a part of ETL process. Describe theprocess. Which of these are most time consuming? [10]

b) What is the star and snow flake schema? Compare the advantages anddisadvantages. [6]

Q3) a) Explain the pattern recognition technique for exploring data indatabase. [8]

b) Why is predictive modeling technique the most successful method ofData mining? List the various assumptions made. [8]

Q4) Write short notes on any three: [18]

a) Neural Network.

b) Disadvantages of Distributed databases.

c) OLTP vrs DSS.

d) The three aspects distributed database system that defines its architecture.

[3765]-707 - 2 -

SECTION - II

Q5) a) Explain the concept of ECA in active Databases. [8]

b) What is a active database. Explain with an example. How is it differentfrom an passive database? [8]

Q6) a) Explain the OO database concepts of object structure, OID andODL. [8]

b) How are the OO concepts incorporated in OO database? [8]

Q7) a) What is meant by web crawler? What are the challenges to webinformation retrieval? [8]

b) Explain the web crawler architecture in detail. [8]

Q8) Write short notes on any three: [18]

a) Need of OO database.

b) Temporal and spatial databases.

c) XML database.

d) 2 phase locking.


[3765] - 709M.E. (Information Technology)

INTERNET AND WEB TECHNOLOGIES(Elective - III) (Revised Course 2008) (Sem. - II)



1) All questions are compulsory.




P1794

SECTION - I

Q1) a) Explain Kerberos system. [10]

b) Explain DHCP protocol. [8]

OR

a) Explain LDAP protocol & its applications. [10]

b) Describe DNS request - reply model. [8]

Q2) a) Explain MIB structure. [8]

b) What is Internet management frame work? [8]

OR

a) How search engine works? [8]

b) Compare perl and PHP. [8]

Q3) a) What are the features of web 2.0? [8]b) Describe RSS feeds. [8]

ORa) Explain SOAP protocol. [8]b) Explain Ajax design basics. [8]

P.T.O.

SECTION - II

Q4) a) Explain MVC design pattern. [10]b) Explain J2EE Architecture. [8]

ORa) Compare various Web browsers. [10]b) Illustrate VRML. [8]

Q5) a) Describe Applet & Servlets Architecture. [8]b) Explain JAVA bean. [8]

ORa) Describe CORBA standard. [8]b) State various C# features. [8]

Q6) a) Explain JNDI system. [8]b) Explain JMS application usage. [8]

ORa) Describe steps to develope JSR168 portlet. [8]b) What is internationalization & localization? [8]

[3765] - 709 -2-


[3765]-712M.E. (Information Technology)

MOBILE COMPUTING AND M-COMMERCE

(Elective - III) (2008 Course) (514411 C)







5) Assume suitable data if necessary.

SECTION - I

Q1) a) Explain the term interference in the space, time, frequency and codedomain. What are the countermeasures in SDMA, TDMA, FDMA andCDMA systems? [8]

b) Explain how interconnected mobile services switching centers enable amobile station to communicate to another over long distances. How doesthe network subsystem change when the communication is to a PSTNterminal? [8]

Q2) a) Discuss the tunneling and encapsulation in Mobile IP. [8]

b) Discuss the spread spectrum techniques. [8]

Q3) a) Describe the various cryptographic algorithms. What is the differencebetween a digital signature and digital certificate? Why do you need athird party in digital certification? [8]

b) Describe the GPRS architecture and protocols? How many of themalready exist in GSM. [8]

Q4) a) What is MMS? How is it different from Short Message Service andExtended Message Service? Explain the MMS architecture with diagram?

[8]

P1795

P.T.O.

b) How localization of a subscriber is carried out in GSM? What is‘handover’ in mobile system? How it is effected in GSM? [8]

Q5) Write a short note on: [18]

a) Wireless Broadband.

b) PKI.

c) EDGE.

SECTION - II

Q6) a) Describe mobile IP protocol. Explain with diagram, how a correspondentmobile node on a visit sends and receives IP packets to and from anothermobile node and also on a visit at another foreign network. How doesthe packet delivery mechanism in the mobile IP protocol differ from thatin the IP protocol? [10]

b) Explain the concept of wireless markup language. [8]

Q7) a) Explain the function of the components of the WAP architecture. [8]

b) Show master-slave architecture in piconet of Bluetooth devices. Whatare the states in which a Bluetooth device can be found? [8]

Q8) a) Differentiate between the functions of labels, tags and cards. How dosmart cards, smart labels, smart tokens and RFID tags work, if they haveno internal battery? [8]

b) What is Wi-Max? How it is different than Wi-Fi? [8]

Q9) a) Explain the implementation challenges in M-commerce. [8]

b) Define m-commerce and explain how an e-government could use it toincrease its efficiency and effectiveness. [8]

Q10)a) Describe m-business along with its benefits and challenges. [8]

b) What are the emerging issues in mobile commerce? [8]

Y

[3765] - 712 2


[3765]-730M.E. (Environmental Engineering)SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT


Instructions to the candidates:1) Answer any 3 questions from each section.2) Answers to the two sections should be written in separate books.3) Neat diagrams must be drawn wherever necessary.4) Figures to the right indicate full marks.

P1805

P.T.O.

SECTION - I

Q1) a) What are the objectives of solid waste management and discuss theenvironmental impact of mismanagement. [8]

b) Explain the hierarchy of integrated solid waste management. [8]

Q2) a) Discuss the guidelines for sorting of solid waste and materialrecovery. [8]

b) What are the means and methods for transportation of solid waste? [8]

Q3) Discuss the following in details; [18]

a) Fundamentals of Thermal processing for composting of solid waste.

b) Performance characteristics of size reduction equipments used for solidwaste.

Q4) Explain the principle, construction and working of the following withneat diagrams; [16]

a) Waste Heat Boilers.

b) Incineration.

[3765]-730 - 2 -

SECTION - II

Q5) a) What are the types of landfills? Explain the essentials components oflandfilling. [8]

b) Discuss the site selection and various methods of landfilling. [8]

Q6) What are the various elements of financial management plan for solid wastesystem? [16]

Q7) For solid waste disposal site, the avg.-speed data obtained is;

Distance5 10 15 20 25 30X, km/trip

Avg. Haul speed,12 18 22 28 32 36Y, km/hr

Total Time, hr. 0.41 0.55 0.68 0.71 0.78 0.83

Find the haul speed constants “a” and “b” and the total time for site locatedat 18 km away. [16]


a) Fluidized bed combustion.

b) Waste heat recovery and co-generation.

c) Pyrolysis.


[3765]-746

M.E. (Instru. & Control) (Process & Biomedical)

ADVANCED SIGNAL PROCESSING

(2008 Course)






P1812

P.T.O.

SECTION - I

Q1) Define the term multirate signal processing. Explain decimation by factorD and obtain an expression for decimated signal at the output. [16]

Q2) What is mean by WSS process? Explain the different models of stochasticprocess. [16]

Q3) Explain the efficient implementation of sampling rate conversion systemusing Polyphase filter structure. What are the noble identities in samplingrate conversion system? [16]

Q4) a) What is the necessity of Time-Frequency analysis of the signal? DefineSTFT and explain the signal analysis using STFT. State thedisadvantages of STFT. [10]

b) Explain the term Cepstrum and the properties of the Cepstrum. [8]

[3765]-746 - 2 -

SECTION - II

Q5) What do you mean by adaptive filtering? Describe the LMS algorithm foradaptive filtering. Explain one application of adaptive filtering. [18]

Q6) Define Wavelet Transform. Explain the signal analysis and synthesis usingwavelet transform. [16]

Q7) Explain any two Nonparametric methods of power spectrum estimation.State the disadvantages of Nonparametric methods over the parametricmethods of power spectrum estimation. [16]

Q8) a) What is Orthogonal Transform? Explain Sine and Cosinetransforms. [8]

b) Explain in detail anyone application of Homomorphic deconvolution.[8]


[3765]-748M.E. (Instrumentation & Control)

MODERN CONTROL THEORY(2008 Course)


1) Answer any two questions from each section.2) Assume suitable data, if necessary.3) Figures to the right indicate full marks.

SECTION - I

Q1) Solve following:

a) Obtain Transfer Function from given plant model: [10]

˙ x t( ) = Αx t( ) + Βu t( )

y(t) = Cx(t) where

Α =0 −1 0

0 −1 1

0 −1 −10

B =

0

1

10

C = 1 0 0[ ]

b) Consider the system with state equation: [10]

x1⋅

x2⋅

x3⋅

=

0 1 0

0 0 1

−6 −11 −6

x1

x2

x3

+0

0

1

u

Estimate the state controllability by:

i) Kalman’s test and

ii) Gilbert’s test.

c) Apply Jury stability for characteristics polynomial: [5]

F(z) = 2z4 + 7z3 + 10z2 + 4z + 1

P1813

P.T.O.


a) For a given transfer function of system. [10]

G(s) = s + 3s3 + 9s2 + 24s + 20

Obtain:

i) First companion form.

ii) Second companion form and

iii) Jordan canonical form.

b) For a LTI system find x(t) for u(t) = 1 for t ≥ 1. [10]

x1⋅

x2⋅

=

0 1

−2 −3

x1

x2

+

0

1

u

c) Explain significance of zero order hold in digital control system andalso draw it frequency response. [5]


a) A closed loop control system is described in figure below. Determinethe output c(z) when a unit step is applied to the input. [10]

[3765] - 748 2

b) Find the stability of system with the help of Bilinear transformation.[10]

c) Determine pulse transfer function for PID controller. [5]

SECTION - II


a) Obtain the discrete time state and output equations and the pulse transferfunction (T = 1) of the following continuous time system. [10]

G(s) = 1s s + 2( )

b) Obtain the state transition matrix of the following discrete time system.

x(k + 1) = Gx(k) + Hu(k)

y(k) = Cx(k) where

G = 0 1

−0.16 −1

H =

1

1

C = [1 0] [10]

c) Write short note on Smith McMillan form. [5]


a) Consider a multiple input multiple output system having the transferfunction. [10]

G(s) =

4s + 1( ) s + 2( )

−0 . 5s +1( )

1s + 2( )

2s + 1( ) s + 2( )

.

i) Find the Smith McMillan form by performing elementary row andcolumn operations.

ii) Find poles and zeros. iii) Build a RMFD for the model.

[3765] - 748 3

b) For a nominal plant model: [10]

Go(s) = s − 4s −1( ) s + 4( )

Consider all closed loop poles to lie to the left of –0.5 in the complexplane also controller include integral action.

i) Find a particular controller satisfying these conditions.

ii) Parameterize all controllers satisfying this condition.

c) Solve the following difference equation by use of the z transform. [5]

x(k +1) + 3x(k +1) + 2x(k) = 0, x(0) = 0, x(1) = 1


a) A diagonal controller C(s) is proposed to control a MIMO plant withnominal model Go(s). If C(s) and Go(s) are given by [10]

Go(s) =

2s + 1( )

1s + 1( ) s + 2( )

1s + 1( ) s + 2( )

2s + 2( )

C(s) =

2

s0

01s

Determine whether the closed loop is stable.

b) Obtain the block diagrams for the following pulse transfer function systemby i) Direct, ii) Standard and iii) Ladder programming. [10]

G(z) = 2 − 0 . 6z−1

1 + 0 . 5z−1

c) Explain Liapunov theorem on stability. [5]

Y

[3765] - 748 4


[3765]-751M.E. (Instrumentation and Control) (Biomedical Instrumentation)

BIO-SIGNAL PROCESSING(5061204-A) (2008 Course)


1) Answer any 3 questions from each section.2) Answers to the two sections should be written in separate books.3) Figures to the right indicate full marks.4) Assume suitable data, if necessary.

SECTION - I

Q1) a) Calculate the cross-correlation using the formula of the sequences,

x1(n) = 2, 1, 2, 1

x2(n) = 1, 3, 2, 1 [8]

b) Calculate the linear convolution using the formula of the sequences,

x(n) = 1, 2, 1, 1

h(n) = 1, 2, 2, 1. [8]

Q2) a) Determine the response of the system described by,

y n( ) = 56

y n −1( ) − 16

y n − 2( ) + x n( )

to the input, x n( ) = n( ) − 13

n − 1( ). [8]

b) Explain the properties of Z-transform (any eight). [8]

Q3) a) Find the 8-point DFT of

x n( ) = 1 + cos2 n

4

. [8]

b) Sketch the signal flow graph of 8-point decimation-in-time algorithm.[8]

P1814

P.T.O.

Q4) Design the causal linear phase FIR filter for following specifications:

Hd e j( ) =e− j , c1 ≤ ≤ c 2

0, otherwise

c1 = 1 rad/sec, c2 = 2 rad/sec and M = 7.

Use the window functions:

a) Rectangular window.

b) Bartlett window.

c) Hanning window.

d) Hamming window. [18]

SECTION - II

Q5) a) A filter operating at a sampling frequency of 1000 samples / sec has apole at z = 1 and a zero at z = 2. What is the magnitude of its amplituderesponse at 500 Hz? [4]

b) A filter has the difference equation,

y(n) = y(n – 1) – y(n – 2) + x(n) + x(n – 1)

What is its transfer function? [4]

c) A Butterworth analog filter has the cut-off frequency Ωc = 0.707 rad/sec and order N = 3.

i) Plot the poles on the Butterworth circle. [2]

ii) Obtain the transfer function of this analog filter i.e. H(s). [3]

iii) Using the impulse invariance method, transform this an analog filterH(s) to a digital filter H(z).Write the transfer function H(z) andstate whether this transfer function H(z) and state whether this is astable filter or otherwise.

Assume T = 1 sec. [5]

Q6) a) What are the main advantages of adaptive filters over fixed filters? [4]

b) Discuss the LMS algorithm in adaptive filtering. [8]

c) Explain in brief any three medical applications of adaptive filtering.[6]

[3765] - 751 2

Q7) a) Describe the advantages and disadvantages of modified Huffman coding.[8]

b) What are the various finite word length register effects? Describe thequantization error in detail. [8]

Q8) a) List out the common capabilities of commercial Digital Signal ProcessorSoftware. [8]

b) Compare the functional advantages of floating point and fixed pointregisters. [8]

Y

[3765] - 751 3


[3765]-759M.E. (Polymer Engg.)

POLYMER PROCESSING AND TESTING(2008 Course)



1) Answer Q1 or Q2, Q3 or Q4 and Q5 or Q6 from Section-I. Answer Q7 or Q8,Q9 or Q10 and Q11 or Q12 from Section-II.


3) Use of pocket calculator, log paper, log-log paper is allowed.


5) Draw neat sketches wherever required.

P1816

P.T.O.

SECTION - I

Q1) a) Draw and explain in short interaction diagram for reactive extrusionfor chain growth reactions. [8]

b) Discuss the use of compounding and compatibilization using reactiveextrusion technique. Discuss mechanisms and extruder parametersaffecting the process. [8]

Q2) a) Explain the use of gear or melt pump in extrusion and discuss generationof high frequency pressure pulses. Discuss in general performance ofgear pumps. [8]

b) Discuss screw geometry and other design considerations fordevolatilization extruders. [8]

Q3) a) Derive an expression for mean effective pressure across cavity forcalculation of clamping tonnage in injection moulding. Deriveexpression for both isothermal and non-isothermal situation. Discussthe effect of injection rate on cavity pressure. [12]

[3765]-759 - 2 -

b) Bring out difference between injection moulding of amorphous materialand crystalline material. [4]

Q4) a) Discuss contiguous melting model and dispersed solids melting model.Give importance of melt film thickness, melt film temperature andwiping action of the screw. [10]

b) Draw a neat sketch of any one type of pipe die and explain thefunctioning. [6]

Q5) a) Draw a neat sketch of accumulator based die head assembly with parisoncontrol and explain the assembly. [8]

b) Discuss in short effect of plug on wall thickness in thermoformingprocess. [4]

c) Draw a neat sketch of extrusion sheet or pipe line. Explain in short allthe down stream equipment. [6]

Q6) a) With neat sketch explain reaction injection moulding with reference toapplication and process control. [6]

b) With neat sketches explain the significance of upper and lower formingtemperature. Explain also difference in thermoforming of amorphousand crystalline material. [6]

c) A small flower pot is to be thermoformed using negative forming.Plastic sheet initial thickness is 2.5 mm. Estimate the thickness of thepot at a point 40 mm from the top. Calculate also draw ratio ofthermoforming. [6]

SECTION - II

Q7) a) Explain stress relaxation and its significance. Explain the test methodsand relevant standards to measure this data for polymeric material. [8]

b) Write in short about fatigue of plastics. Explain the test methods andrelevant standards. [8]

Q8) a) Explain different types of impact tests in short. [8]

b) Discuss generalised creep curve for plastics. Explain test arrangementfor measurement of tensile and flexural creep. [8]

Q9) a) What is dielectric strength? Discuss the factors on which dielectricstrength depends. Explain the test procedure with a neat sketch. [8]

b) Differentiate between volume and surface resistivity. Explain the testprocedure and relevant standards. [10]

Q10) a) Explain different accelerated weathering tests using artificial lightsources to simulate the natural sunlight. [9]

b) Explain flammability and list different flammability tests and explainany one in detail. [9]

Q11) a) Explain the test method and apparatus for measurement of thermalconductivity of plastics. [6]

b) Explain quartz-tube dilatometer used for measurement of coefficientof linear thermal expansion of polymers. [4]

c) Explain any one basic ultrasonic measurement technique used for non-destructive inspection of plastics. [6]

Q12) a) Discuss any one optical test method used for non-destructive inspectionof plastics. [8]

b) Explain the test methods for measurement of gas permeability andwater vapour permeability of polymers used in food packaging. [8]

[3765]-759 - 3 -


[3765]-767M.E. (Polymer)

POLYMER STRUCTURE PROPERTY & RELATIONSHIPS(509123) (2008 Course)



1) Answer 3 questions from Section-I and 3 questions from Section-II.






P1820

P.T.O.

SECTION - I

Q1) a) Define hindrances potential or potential rotation barrier and how itrelated with internal rotational in molecules with examples? [6]

b) Differentiate between configuration and conformation & explain whystereoisomerism is not possible in case of saturated compound havingdifferent substitutes at same carbon atom. [6]

c) Why PP has higher melting point than PE? [4]

OR

Q2) a) What is chain flexibility? State various types of chain flexibility? Explain importance of chain flexibility. [6]

b) List the factor affecting kinetic flexibility and discuss any two withexamples. [6]

c) What are short range and long rang interaction? Discuss it significancesrelated with polymer molecules. [4]

[3765]-767 - 2 -

Q3) a) Discuss single crystals. Draw lamellar single-crystals with neat sketch.[6]

b) Discuss mechanism of spherulite formation morphology in polymer.Discuss morphology related to transference and strength of film, fiberproduct. [6]

c) Differentiate between fibrillar crystals and globular crystals. [4]

OR

Q4) a) State different methods for investigation of polymer structure andexplain x- ray diffraction method. [6]

b) Explain with neat sketch peterlin model of the structure of orientedpolymer. [6]

c) Discuss “bundle(cluster) model of amorphous material”. [4]

Q5) a) State different methods of determining modules of multicomponentpolymeric material and explain any two in detail. [7]

b) Discuss the method to determine the glass transition temperature ofpolymer composites. [7]

c) Write a short note on morphology of multi phase polymeric material.[4]

OR

Q6) a) With any two examples how low molecular weight is required beforeprocessing and later high modules is obtained? [8]

b) What are molecular weight requirement for process? [6]

i) paper coating by PE.

ii) injection molding.

iii) extrusion.

iv) blow molding.

Justify your answer.

c) Which one of following is easy to process? [4]

i) thermoplastic A sample with narrow molecular weight distribution.

ii) thermoplastic B sample with broad molecular weight distribution.

(polymer sample “A” and polymer sample “B” has same averagemolecular weight and chemical composition) why?

SECTION - II

Q7) a) Explain the effect of length of side chain on the flexibility of thepolymer citing suitable examples. [8]

b) If a monomer is substituted by different functional groups, how doesit affect the glass transition temperature? [8]

OR

Q8) a) What is the effect of polar group on the properties such as glass transitiontemperature, solution viscosity melt viscosity and adhesion? Discusswith suitable examples. [8]

b) Melt viscosity of PVC (unplasticised) is more than that of polyethyleneof the same MW, MWD. Explain it on the basis of molecularinteractions. [8]

Q9) a) Correlate mechanical failure with the molecular mobility of varyingpolymers. [8]

b) Discuss the effect of molecular flexibility on any two of thefollowing: [8]

i) the electrical resistance,

ii) Dielectric properties.

OR

Q10) a) What are the molecular factors that influence the crystallinity of polymer?Explain with suitable examples. [8]

b) How do the processing conditions affect the crystallinity? Discuss it atfast and slow heating and cooling rates. [8]

Q11) a) How does Tm affect processing condition? Describe the change inorientation with reference to (i) injection molding, (ii) extrusion offilm, (iii) thermoforming and heat sealing. [6]

b) Discuss the effect of crystallinity on the (i) modulus, (ii) stiffness,(iii) hardness. [6]

c) ‘Presence of polar group affects HDT, decomposition temperature andcombustibility of the polymer’. Discuss. [6]

[3765]-767 - 3 -

OR

Q12) a) Explain the role of crystallinity on the following processes: [6]

i) injection molding,

ii) extrusion of film,

iii) thermoforming.

b) Explain the non uniform microstructures such as spherulite and micellesin the chemically similar polymer samples. [6]

c) Describe the use of introducing the temporary microstructureheterogeneity in the polymeric pastes, emulsion and powders. [6]

[3765]-767 - 4 -


[3765]-775M.E. (Printing Engineering & Graphic Communication)

Printing Technology Management

(508102) (2008 Course)Time : 3 Hours] [Max. Marks : 100


1) Answer any two questions from each sections.

2) Answer to the two sections should be written in separate books.


4) Figures in right indicates marks.

P1824

P.T.O.

SECTION - I

Q1) Answer the following:

a) Explain functions of Production Planning department in a FlexoPrinting Company. [9]

b) The following data is about the sales of a domestic water pumpmanufactured by ABC Company. Forecast demand for the pumps forthe next 3 years. Determine the regression equation. [9]

Year 1986 1987 1988 1989 1990 1991 1992 1993 1994 1995

Sales 30 33 37 39 42 46 48 50 55 58

Deviation -2.5 -2.0 -1.5 -1.0 -0.5 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5

c) Explain objectives of production management. [7]


a) Explain different stages of product design [10]

b) Explain different stages in product life cycle with suitable examples.[15]

[3765]-775 - 2 -

Q3) Answer the following.

a) Explain different types of forecast errors and reasons causing them. [9]

b) The data in the table represents the annual sale of Plate containers asfollows-

Year 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Sales (in ’00) 80 90 92 83 94 99 92

i) Determine the best line of fit.

ii) Forecast the demand for 8th, 9th and 12th year. [16]

SECTION - II


a) Compare the following Inventory Analysis methods. [8]

i) ABC and VED.

ii) ABC and HML.

b) Derive The Deterministic Economic Order Quantity model for InventoryShortage. [8]

c) The rate of use of particular raw material from store is 40 units peryear, the cost of placing and receiving an order is Rs. 80, the cost ofeach unit is Rs. 200, the cost of carrying inventory in percent per yearis 0.16 and it depends upon average stock. Determine the economicorder quantity. If the lead time is 4 months, then calculate the reorderpoint. [9]


a) Explain the implementation of a six sigma concept in printingindustry. [10]

b) Explain fundamental concepts of quality. [8]

c) Design specifications call for a target value of 16 ± 0.2 and observedprocess output mean is 15.9 and standard deviation is 0.1.

Calculate Process Capability and Centeredness of process. [7]


a) Explain different types of control charts and their utility in printingindustry. [8]

b) A double sampling plan is as follows:

N = 5000, n1 = 100, c1 = 0, n2 = 100 and c2 = 1

i) Use Poisson’s table to compute the probability of acceptance of a1% defective lot.

ii) Assume that a lot rejected by this sampling plan will be 100%inspected. What will be the AOQ if the submitted product is 1%defected? Considering both the inspection of rejected lots will bethe average number of articles inspected per lot if the submittedproduct is 1% defective? [10]

c) Six consecutive lots of gear were inspected by sampling process at thefinal inspection. The number of defectives observed in different samples,each sample consisting of 100 pieces, is given below: [7]

Sample No. 1 2 3 4 5 6

No. of Defectives 2 5 4 3 6 4

Draw a control chart for the fraction defectives.

[3765]-775 - 3 -


[3765] - 776M.E. (Printing Engineering and Graphic Communication)

MODERN TRENDS IN PRINTING(2008 Course) (508103)







P1899

SECTION - I

Q1) a) Draw a neat sketch and explain various components of offset press. [15]

b) What is the difference between offset inks used for publication, packagingand production printing? [10]

Q2) a) Explain applications of flexography in label printing. [10]

b) With reference to plate making discuss :- [8]

i) Conventional plate making.

ii) Digital plate making.

c) Discuss the importance of anitox roller used in flexoprinting. [7]

Q3) a) Discuss the process of chemical etched gravure cylinders. [15]

b) Discuss various types of doctor blades used in gravure printing. Explainpurpose of using these blades. [10]

SECTION - II

Q4) a) Explain difference between elastomer and rubber. [10]

b) Enlist share hardnesser used for impression rollers in offset, flexographyand gravure. [8]

c) What is the effect of hardness in print quality? [7]

P.T.O.

Q5) a) Describe the operation of electronic line shaft drive system. [10]

b) Draw a neat sketch and explain operation of pneumatic system used fornip roll on press. [8]

c) Discuss various limitations of common shaft drive. [7]

Q6) a) Describe step by step procedure used for handling printing shop duringfour presses are in operation. [9]

b) Explain the purpose of curing room used in press-shop. [8]

c) Write a short note on - Preventive Maintenance planned for press. [8]

[3765] - 776 -2-


[3765]-786M.E. (Printing Engineering and Graphic Communication)

MULTIMEDIA SYSTEMS AND COMMUNICATION

(2008 Course) (508111A)



1) Answer any TWO questions from each section.





SECTION - I

Q1) a) What are different video formats and systems used for TV? Giveadvantages of them over the other. [15]

b) Explain technical advances in digital video editing techniques. What isthe workflow for digital video generation? [10]

Q2) a) What is object oriented programming system. Explain the concept.[10]

b) How image editing is done digitally? [7]

c) Write notes on light pen and touch screen monitor? [8]

Q3) a) Explain streaming media, its standards and requirements. [10]

b) Elaborate the term interactive multimedia. Where is the application?[7]

c) Which compression techniques are used for multimedia? [8]

SECTION - II

Q4) a) Write short notes on Internet radio, Internet chat and online shopping.[15]

b) What are software agents? Elaborate the concept. [10]

P1828

P.T.O.

Q5) a) Write short notes on HTML and XML. [15]

b) What are different IP address systems? [10]

Q6) a) Describe the sensors used for digital camera? What are different sensorsizes and resolutions? [15]

b) How the digital image processing is done with camera raw? What aredifferent facilities provided by camera raw for image adjustment? [10]

Y

[3765] - 786 2


[3765]-788M.E. (Printing Engineering & Graphic Communication)

PRESS FINGERPRINTING

(2008 Course) (508111(C))







5) Figures on right indicate marks.

SECTION - I

Q1) a) Explain need of standardization in fingerprinting? [10]

b) Explain design consideration for prepress requirements? [15]

Q2) a) What are variables considered on press optimization? [10]

b) Give short notes on dot gain. [8]

c) What is grey balance and color deviation? [7]

Q3) a) Explain spectrophotometer working. [15]

b) Write short notes on: [10]

i) Tracker line. ii) Vignette.

SECTION - II

Q4) a) What is ICC profiling? [15]

b) Explain plan and run standardization. [10]

Q5) a) Explain analysis of results in fingerprinting. [10]

b) What is profile editing? [8]

c) Give workflow setup for fingerprinting? [7]

P1830

P.T.O.

Q6) a) How control charts are used for fingerprinting? [10]

b) Explain statistical techniques used for sample and analysis. [8]

c) Explain process stability and process capability. [7]

Y

[3765] - 788 2


[3765] - 793M.E. (E & TC) (Signal Processing)DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING

(Elective - I) (2008 Pattern)Time : 3 Hours] [Max. Marks : 100







P1903

SECTION - I

Q1) a) Explain brightness adaptation and discrimination property of human eye.[8]

b) Explain the following terms : [8]

i) Spatial resolution.

ii) Gray level resolution.

What is the effect of changing spatial and gray level resolution on imagequality.

Q2) a) What is Pseudocoloring? Give its applications. [8]

b) Explain HSI color model. Give its advantage over RGB color model. [8]

Q3) a) What is separable transform? Whether two dimensional DCT is separabletransform? Justify your answer. What are the advantages of separabletransform? [8]

b) Explain Hommorphic filter. [8]


a) LOG filter.

b) Hough Transform.

c) High boost filter.

P.T.O.

SECTION - II

Q5) a) Explain the difference between image enhancement and Image restoration.[8]

b) Explain technique of image restoration in presence of noise. [8]

Q6) a) Explain the following with respect to compression [8]

i) Compression ratio.

ii) Coding redundancy.

iii) Interpixel redundancy.

iv) Psycho-visual redundancy.

b) Explain transform coding. [8]

Q7) a) Explain how chain code can be used for boundary representation. [8]

b) Explain morphological ‘Hit and Miss Transform’. [8]

Q8) Write short notes on [18]

a) Bit plane coding.

b) Application of image processing for fingerprint identification.

c) JPEG standard.

[3765] - 793 -2-


[3765] - 797M.E. (E & TC) (Signal Processing)

WIRELESS AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION(Elective - II) (2008) (504504)









P1834

SECTION - I

Q1) a) What do you mean by cell sectorization? What are its advantages anddisadvantages? [6]

b) Explain the GSM interfaces in detail. [6]

c) Why does minimizing the reuse distance maximize the spectral efficiencyof a cellular system? [4]

Q2) a) Explain free space loss model. What is the importance of free space lossfactor? [8]

b) The S/I ratio of 15dB is required for satisfactory performance of a cellularsystem. What is the reuse factor and cluster size that should be used formaximum capacity, if path loss exponent is 4. Assume there are 6 co-channel cells in the 1st tier. [5]

c) Explain the concept of diffraction, scattering and reflection with respectto wireless transmission. [5]

Q3) a) Define and explain Earlang B and Earlang C formula for blockingprobability. List the assumptions made in this context. [8]

b) During a busy hour the no. of calls per hour of 10 cells is 2000, 1500,3000, 500, 1000, 1200, 1800, 2500, 2800, 900 respectively. Assume 60%of ear phones are used in this period and 1 call is made per ear phone.Calculate the number of customers in the system. [4]

P.T.O.

c) Let maximum calls per hour in a cell be 4000 and average calling time be1.5 min. If blocking probability is 3%, calculate the offered load. [4]

Q4) a) Along with necessary equations, explain the working of Adaptiveequalizer in a communication receiver. [10]

b) Consider a digital cellular equalizer operating at a frequency of 950 MHz.If the mobile velocity is 60 km/hr, determine [6]

i) Doppler shift.

ii) Coherence time of the channel.

SECTION - II

Q5) a) Draw a flow diagram for call origination. [6]

b) What do you mean by frequency reuse factor? Explain with reference toCDMA system. [6]

c) Describe the flow diagram for a process of granting a traffic channel inCDMA system. [6]

Q6) a) What are the different call processing states in a CDMA system? Explainany one in detail. [6]

b) Given 2 codes, which are C1 = 01010101 and C

2 = 01100110. Prove that

they are orthogonal to each other. [6]

c) Write a short note on CDMA 2000. [4]

Q7) a) Write a short note on Microstrip antenna. [6]

b) Prove that the input impedance of a half wave dipole is 73Ω. [8]

c) Explain “Ping-Pong” effect in GSM. [2]

Q8) a) Explain Turbo Coding. [6]

b) A short antenna with a uniform current distribution in free space has

IdL

= 3 x 10–4 A.m. Calculate Eθ for θ = 90o and φ = 0o, if λ = 10 cm

and γ = 200 cm. Assume far-field components. [6]

c) Explain soft and softer hand off mechanism in a CDMA system. [4]

[3765] - 797 -2-


[3765]-804M.E. (E & TC) (Signal Processing)

MULTIMEDIA TECHNIQUES

(2008 Course)



1) Answer 3 questions from Section I and 3 questions from Section II.







SECTION - I

Q1) a) With the appropriate block diagram, explain JPEG compression standardfor video. [8]

b) Discuss the .wav format & .bmp format for storing audio & image in afile, respectively. [8]

Q2) a) Compare the features of NTSC, PAL & SECAM. [8]

b) Explain the working of NTSC encoder & decoder. Draw suitablediagrams. [8]

Q3) a) Compare lossless compression with lossy compression technique. [8]

b) With respect to video display, explain the following terms: [8]

i) Resolution.

ii) Aspect ratio.

iii) Vector scan.

iv) Raster scan.

P1838

P.T.O.

Q4) a) An NTSC encoded video clip has a frame size of 720 x 480 pixels & isdigitising using a bit - depth of 8 - bits for each Y, Cb & Cr & a chromasub-sampling scheme of 4 : 2 : 2.

Calculate the file size of 2 minutes video clip & total time taken for it tobe transmitted over a 2 Mbps transmission line. [10]

b) Explain different types of animation. [8]

SECTION - II

Q5) a) Explain the steps in creating 3D animation. [8]

b) Explain the salient features of a typical audio editing software. [8]

Q6) a) What is GOP? Explain in detail encoding of various pictures in a GOPin MPEG-1. [8]

b) With the help of block diagram, explain the MPEG-1 audio encoder.Comment on bit rates of compressed audio. [8]

Q7) a) Explain in detail, the MIDI messages. [8]

b) What is a multimedia authoring tool? List different functions ofmultimedia authoring software. [8]

Q8) Explain in short: [18]

a) Psycho-acoustic model for voice.

b) Audio file formats.

c) Properties of a multimedia presentation.

Y

[3765] - 804 2


[3765] - 87M.E. (E & TC) (INSTRUMENTATION) (DIGITAL SYSTEMS)

EMBEDDED SYSTEM DESIGN(2004 Revised Course)


Instructions to the candidates:1) Answer any three questions from each section.2) Answers to the two sections should be written in separate books.3) Neat diagrams must be drawn wherever necessary.4) Figures to the right indicate full marks.5) Use of logarithmic tables, slide rule, Mollier charts, electronic pocket


P1650

SECTION - I

Q1) a) Discuss ARM9 architecture. [8]b) With suitable instructions, explain the barrel shifter operation for boosting

execution performance of ARM processor. [8]

Q2) a) What are different categories of embedded systems? [6]b) Design Surveillance system to monitor and control different sensors and

devices. These sensors and devices include fire sensors, sprinklers andalarms, door sensors and alarms etc. The system capability must includediagnostics, automated local monitoring and remote monitoring overinternet, alarm condition report over PSTN line. [10]

Q3) a) Explain the common design metric for Embedded Systems. [8]b) Suggest real time OS and justify for Handheld Embedded system with

following functionality :i) VoIP. ii) LCD display.iii) Touch screen. iv) Wireless connectivity. [8]

Q4) Write short notes on (any three) : [18]a) Wireless Protocols.b) Watchdog timer.c) Internal RAM architecture of 8051.d) PIC microcontroller architecture.

P.T.O.

SECTION - II

Q5) a) What are differences between following development tools. Illustrate withexamples.i) Simulator and Emulator.ii) Compiler and Cross compiler.iii) Debugger and IDE. [8]

b) Explain Round Robin architecture used in programming of the EmbeddedSystem Design. What are its disadvantages? [8]

Q6) a) Discuss tools with examples used for development of glue logic usingdevices such as ASICs, PLDs, FPGAs. [8]

b) Describe the architecture of typical FPGA. [8]

Q7) a) Compare architecture of Intel 8051 and TI DSP TMS320C54x. [8]b) With suitable example explain Inter Process Communication (IPC) using

mailbox in RTOS. [8]

Q8) Write Short Notes on (Any three): [18]a) Serial Protocols.b) Features of µ COS-II.c) ISA and PCI bus Protocols.d) Task states w.r.t. RTOS.

[3765] - 87 -2-


[3765] - 5

M.E. (Civil) (Construction & Management)

CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS AND MATERIALS

MANAGEMENT









SECTION - I

Q1) Explain the properties required for the materials to be used in nuclear power

plants for radiation attenuation. Explain the experimental procedure for using

serpentine as an aggregate. Discuss advantages of this methodology. [18]

Q2) Explain the process by which silica-fume is produced. Which are different

products of silica-fume? Explain in detail any 2 major applications involving

use of the silica-fume. [16]

Q3) What is self compacting concrete? Which tests are carried out on SCC?

Explain what are its various advantages? Which are the various problems

associated with use of SCC? [16]

Q4) Explain in brief : [16]

a) Smart materials.

b) Fly-ash use in road construction.

c) Nano-technology in construction chemicals.

d) GFRC.

SECTION - II

Q5) Discuss primary and secondary objectives of materials management. Explain

with examples, balancing of materials objectives. Discuss role of a materials

manager on a major construction project. [18]

Q6) Explain with sketches and with the relevant mathematical formulae : [16]

a) Fixed Period Inventory Model.

b) Re-order level Inventory Model.

Q7) With a practical example, discuss importance of lead time in materials

management. Explain with examples, elements of lead time. What efforts

need to be taken to reduce the lead time? Discuss. [16]

Q8) Explain in brief : [16]

a) JIT.

b) MUSIC-3D analysis.

c) EOQ.

d) Various Materials Indices.

Total No. of Questions :8] [Total No. of Pages : 2

[3765]-8 M.E. (Civil) (Const. & Mgmt.)

PROFESSIONAL PRACTICES IN CONSTRUCTION (2002 Course)

Time :4 Hours] [Max. Marks : 100Instructions to the candidates:

1) Answer any three questions from each section.2) Answers to the two sections should be written in separate books.3) Neat diagrams must be drawn wherever necessary.4) Figures to the right indicate full marks.5) Use of logarithmic tables,slide rule, Mollier charts, electronic pocket calculator

and steam tables is allowed.6) Assume suitable data, if necessary.

P1635

SECTION - I

Q1) Discuss the mode of operation, application areas, advantages, limitations ofany 6 types of construction contracts. [18]

Q2) Prepare a weighted score point system for prequalifications of tenderers forenecuting the construction work of tunnelling in soft soil, an estimated cost ofRs. 3,000 crores to be completed on a fast track in 24 calendar months.[16]

Q3) Discuss the factors affecting value of a property consisting of land and buildings.Explain with examples any 4 methods of valuation. [16]

Q4) With reference to the MOS & PI contract conditions, explain the followingclauses. [16]

a) Various advances and their recovery.b) Escalation.c) Dispute resolution.d) R.A.bills and final payment.

SECTION - II

Q5) With respect to ICA (1872) explain with examples. [18]a) Valid, voidable, void contracts.b) Valid excuses for non-performance of contract.c) Revocation of an offer and proposal.d) Consequences of breach.

P.T.O.

[3765]-8 2

Q6) With respect to the arbitration system, explain. [16]a) Major differences between the Arbitration Act (1940) and the

arbitration and conciliation Act (1996).b) Intervention of the courts and their limitations.c) Speaking and non-speaking awards.d) Grounds for challenge as per 1996 Act.

Q7) With a detailed case study, explain the entire process of the DRB, clearlystating the advantages of the system. [16]

Q8) Explain the following : [16]a) FIDIC documents.b) Causes of construction claims.c) Two stage tendering.d) Particular conditions of contract.

# # # #



TQM & MIS IN CONSTRUCTION (2002 Course) (Elective)

Time :4 Hours] [Max. Marks : 100

Instructions to the candidates:1) Answer any three questions from each section.2) Answers to the two sections should be written in separate books.3) Neat diagrams must be drawn wherever necessary.4) Figures to the right indicate full marks.5) Use of logarithmic tables,slide rule, Mollier charts, electronic pocket calculator


P1636

SECTION - I

Q1) Discuss the various drawbacks existing in the Indian construction Industry,and with examples explain how TQM approach can provide an allencompassing solution. [18]

Q2) Explain with examples the various principles and components of TQMprograms. [16]

Q3) On a construction project, the following defects were noted : [16]

a) Reinforcement in beams is exposed and rusted.b) Door frames are faulty and hence door shutters are not fitting in them.c) Even after polishing, the tiles are not showing any glazing, texture, lustre.d) Toilet slabs are leaking.

Suggesti) Preventive measures to avoid each defect.ii) Remedial measures to rectify each defect.iii) Methodology adopted for working out the cost of poor quality for

each defect.iv) Areas in which human resources need to be trained, for implementing

a good quality in construction.

P.T.O.

[3765]-17 2

Q4) Explain the following : [16]a) Deming’s PDCA cycle.b) PRRT software.c) Benchmarking for tolerances.d) Statistical methods for quality control.

SECTION - II

Q5) What is a MIS? What data is necessary to prepare a MIS for a contractor’sorganisation bidding with MSRDC? Discuss advantages of an MIS to thetop management. [18]

Q6) With a flow diagram explain the components and their inter-relationshipsfor preparing any MIS in general. Make suitable assumptions. [16]

Q7) You are the Managing Director of a construction company operating in thereal estate sector, doing global business. Prepare an MIS related to [16]

a) Customer Relationship Management. (CRM)b) Human Resource Management. (HRM)c) Financial Management. (FM)

Q8) Explain the various capabilities of : [16]

a) MS Excel.b) MS Project.c) Prima Vera.

d) ERP software.

# # # #

SECTION - I

Q1) a) Analyse the Vierendeel frame as shown in Figure 1.a. [12]

b) Find the horizontal force resisted by each of the shear walls (1, 2) in asingle storey building as shown in plan in Fig. 1.b. All walls are fixedat base. Consider shear deformation but ignore warping. AssumeE = 2.4G. All walls are 2.5 m high and 0.25 m thick. [13]


[3765]-33M.E. (Civil) (Structures)

ADV. STRUCTURAL MECHANICS(501502) (2002 Old Course)


Instructions to the candidates :1) Answer any two questions from Section I & two questions from Section II.2) Answers to the two sections should be written in separate answer books.3) Neat diagrams must be drawn wherever necessary.4) Your answer will be valued as a whole.5) Use of non programmable pocket calculator is permitted.6) Assume suitable data, if required.

P1639

P.T.O.

[3765]-33 - 2 -

Q2) Analyse the rigid jointed plane frame loaded as shown in Fig. 2. [25]

Q3) a) Using finite difference method formulate equations relating y1, y2 andy3 and loading on the beam for the beam shown in Figure 3a.Given that

( ) ( ) ( )

iiii

iiiiiiiiiiiE

WYIY

II2YII4IYII2YI

]

[

211

11111214

≅+

+−++++−

+++

++−−−−−λ

[10]

b) A simply supported plate a × a is loaded with load q0 per unit area.Using finite difference method obtain the relation for bending momentat the centre of the plate. Assume v = 0.15 [15]

SECTION - II

Q4) a) Analyse the thick cylinder using its usual notations. [13]

b) Determine the principle stresses & direction from the state of stress at a

point as given by MPa

91015

10155

15530

⎥⎥⎥

⎦

⎤

⎢⎢⎢

⎣

⎡−

−. [12]

Q5) a) Obtain expression for displacement of a finite beam on elastic foundationloaded symmetrically at ends. [12]

b) Give step by step Rayleigh-Ritz technique to obtain buckling load of acolumn hinged at two ends. Assume suitable data. [13]

Q6) a) Derive the strain compatibility equations in general state of strain. Obtainthe equations in case of plain stress problem. [10]

b) A rigid jointed frame is as shown in Figure 6.b. Find the collapse loadfor the frame. [15]

[3765]-33 - 3 -


[3765] - 35

M.E. (Civil Structures)

REINFORCED & PRESTRESSED CONCRETE STRUCTURE










SECTION - I

Q1) a) Enumerate characteristic features of yield lines. [4]

b) Draw yield lines for the following slabs : [9]

i) Rectangular slab supported on 2 adjacent edges only.

ii) Right angled triangle slab supported on all three sides.

iii) Trapezoidal slab fixed on all sides.

c) Design a grid slab for the floor of a hall 7.5m × 6m centre to centre

having square grids, 1.5m centre to centre. Use M20 and Fe415. Live

load = 3.5kN/m2 show all the checks for the grid floor system. Draw

neat sketches showing reinforcement details. [12]

Q2) Design an underground circular water tank of internal diameter 6m and

height of water 3m. The tank is having roof slab monolithic with walls at

ground level. Other data is as given below : [25]

Angle of repose = 30°

Ground water table upto ground level.

SBC = 200 kN/m2

Use M25 and Fe415

Permissible stresses in steel are 150 MPa and 190 MPa for near water face

and away from water face respectively. Show neat sketches showing details

of reinforcement.

Q3) a) Explain the structural design criteria of foundation to rotary machines.

[7]

b) Explain the design aspects of shear walls. [8]

c) Describe the various loading condition and also the critical loading

combinations to be considered in the design of a box culvert. [10]

SECTION - II


a) C and P line and concordant cable profile.

b) Bursting tension evaluation in end block design.

c) Deflection of prestressed concrete beam.

d) Shear design in prestressed concrete beam.

Q5) A prestressed post tensioned beam is to be designed to carry an imposed

load of 15kN/m over the full span of 25m. It is simply supported at the

ends and has an unsymmetrical I section. Design the beam adopting M50

concrete and permissible stresses as per IS : 1343. Take 18% losses in

prestress. Reinforcing cables have a characteristic strength of 1800MPa.

check the section for stresses at transfer and under working condition. Specify

the cable profile. Assume any other data required. [25]

Q6) A prestressed concrete flat slab of overall size (23 × 20)m is supported by

sixteen columns arranged in four rows. The columns are spaced 7m and 6m

in the direction of long and short span of slab with a cantilever of 1m all

around. The 200mm thick slab continuous over three bays in transverse

directions, supports a live load of 4 kN/m2. Design the slab. Assume 12/7

cables stressed to 1000N/mm2; tensile stresses in slab to be zero under full

live load. Assume other relevant data. [25]


[3765] - 40M.E. (Civil) (Structures)

NON-LINEAR ANALYSIS OF STRUCTURE (2002 Course) (Elective - I)


1) Answer any two questions from each section.2) Figures to the right indicate full marks.3) Assume suitable data if required.4) Use of non programmable calculator is permitted.5) Use of stability coefficient table is permitted.

SECTION - I

Q1) a) Derive moment curvature non linearity equation for a beam. [5]

b) Discuss types of non linearities in a structure & give its examples. [8]

c) Find approximate solution for the moment curvature non linear analysis

of cantilever beam subjected to point load at end. [12]

Q2) a) Using Hamilton’s principle derive. Equations for strain energies due

to stretching & bending in a orthotropic plate. [18]

b) Obtain the load-deflection relation for non linear analysis of isotropic

rectangular plate. [7]

Q3) a) Explain Newton-Raphson method for solution of non linear problem.

[6]

b) Explain steps in non linear analysis of structure. [6]

c) Obtain collapse mechanism for cantilever beam to added with

distributed load through span & prop supported at free end. [13]

SECTION - II

Q4) a) Derive non linear stiffness matrix for plane frame member. [18]

b) Develop stiffness matrix in global X-Y co-ordinates for the member

AB of the plane frame as shown in fig. 4. b. [7]

Q5) a) Write steps involved in elastic-plastic analysis of frame. [7]

b) Develop the stiffness matrix for the nonlinear analysis of the plane

frame as shown 5.b.

c/s of AB & BC is 125mm × 125mm E = 200 GPa. Perform two

iterations. [18]

Q6) a) Explain; non-linear representation of stress-strain behaviour in plain

stress problem. [7]

b) Perform elasto-plastic analysis of cantilever beam as shown in Fig. 6.b.

The beam has c/s. 100mm × 100mm, & E = 200 GPa. [18]

SECTION - I

Q1) a) Obtain overall transfer function on system shown in Fig. 1. [10]


[3765]-48

M.E. (Mech.) (Design Engg. & Heat Power Engg.)INSTRUMENTATION & AUTOMATIC CONTROL

(502102) (2002 Revised Course)







5) Use of logarithmic tables, slide rule, Mollier charts, eletronic pocketcalculator and steam tables is allowed.


P1643

P.T.O.

[3765]-48 - 2 -

b) Find the transfer function of block diagram shown in Fig. 2. [8]

Q2) a) Discuss different sources of error in measurement. [6]

b) Find frequency specifications for )8(

16)(G

+=

sss for unity feedback

system. [10]

Q3) a) Explain the criteria for stability of system. [8]

b) For the following type of system 2)4.01)(1(

)21(K)(G

sss

ss

+++= find value

of ‘K’ to limit steady state error to 10% for an input ‘t’. [8]

Q4) a) Explain architecture of a PLC system. [10]

b) Draw a ladder diagram for batch water heating system. The controlsystem has two push buttons. The start push button is .NO type andNC contacts are provided for sensing high level and low level of water.

[6]

SECTION - II

Q5) a) Explain Pneumatic P + I + D controller. [8]

b) Explain with one example of each system. [8]i) Feed forward system.

ii) Feedback system.

Q6) a) Explain the construction and working of ultrasonic flowmeter. [8]

b) Explain with a neat sketch the working of thermal conductivitygauges. [8]

Q7) a) Compare Step-Input response of first order and second order system.[10]

b) Explain various elements of signal conditioning system. [8]

Q8) Write short notes on any 4 of the following : [16]

a) Hot wire anemometer.

b) Piezoelectric accelerometer.

c) Resistance thermometer.

d) Electronic controllers.

e) Instrumentation amplifiers.

[3765]-48 - 3 -


[3765]-55 M.E. (Mechanical) (Heat Power)

ADVANCED REFRIGERATION & CRYOGENICS(Revised Course 2002)


1) Answer three questions from each section.2) Answers to the two sections should be written in separate books.3) Neat diagrams must be drawn whenever necessary.4) Figures to the right indicate full marks.5) Use of logarithmic tables, Mollier charts, electronic pocket calculator is allowed.6) Assume suitable data, if necessary.

P1644

SECTION - I

Q1) What do you understand by “Thermodynamic Irreversibility”? Discuss theeffect of irreversibility on the performance of vapour compression cycle withthe help of T-s diagram. [16]

Q2) a) Two-stage cascade refrigeration system operating between the pressure limitsof 0.8 and 0.14 MPa. Each stage operates on an ideal vapor-compressionrefrigeration cycle with refrigerant R 134a as working fluid. Heat rejectionfrom the lower cycle to the upper cycle takes place in an adiabatic counter-flow heat exchanger where both streams enter at about 0.32 MPa. If themass flow rate of the refrigerant through the topping cycle is 0.05 kg/s.Determine (i) the mass flow rate of refrigerant through the bottoming cycle,(ii) the rate of heat removal from the refrigerated space and power input to thecompressor, and (iii) coefficient of performance of this cascade refrigerator.State assumptions if any. Show the cycle on T-s and p-h diagram. [12]

b) Explain eutectic point & typical applications for secondary refrigerants. [4]

Q3) a) Explain in brief, the guidelines for refrigerant piping design. [6]b) Explain selection of motors. [5]c) Explain difference between flooded and DX Evaporators. [5]

P.T.O.

[3765]-55 2

Q4) Write short notes on (any Three) (with the help of neat sketches) : [18]a) Evaporative Condenser.b) Immersion freezing.c) Volute pump.d) Thermostatic Expansion valve.e) Working of Scroll compressor and its applications.

SECTION - II

Q5) a) Derive expression for COP of an ideal vapour absorption system.Discuss the important Commercial applications of absorption systems.

[10]b) Explain with neat sketch, the working of an Electrolux refrigerator.[6]

Q6) Explain the working principle with a schematic diagram and applicationsof the following refrigeration systems- [18]a) Vortex Tube.b) Thermoelectric.c) Steam Jet.

Q7) Define Cryogenics. What is the difference between cryogenic engineeringand low temperature physics? What is a cryogenic engine? Explain the Lindesystem with help of schematic diagram and T-s chart. How this system defersfrom Linde-Precooled system. [16]

Q8) Write short notes on (Any Four) : [16]a) Adiabatic demagnetization.b) Superconducting devices.c) Cryogenic Insulations.d) Gas Separation and purification.e) Applications of cryogenics in Medicine.

# # # #


[3765] - 59M.E. (Mech.) (Heat Power)

ADVANCED AIR CONDITIONING HEATING ANDVENTILATION

(2002 Old Course) (502110) (Elective - II)Time : 3 Hours] [Max. Marks : 100Instructions to the candidates:

1) Answer any three questions from each section.2) Answers to the two sections should be written in separate books.3) Neat diagrams must be drawn wherever necessary.4) Figures to the right indicate full marks.5) Use of psychrometric charts and tables, Mollier charts, electronic pocket


SECTION - I

Q1) a) Discuss with definition all the terms used in Psychrometry related to

humidity. [6]

b) Define human comfort and discuss the factors affecting it. [6]

c) What is Industrial Air Conditioning? Explain any one application in

detail. [6]

Q2) Write notes on (any four) : [16]

a) Solar heat gain through out side walls & roofs.

b) Solar heat gain through Glass Areas.

c) Heat gain from occupants.

d) Heat gain from Appliances.

e) Heat gain due to Ventilation & Infiltration.

Q3) a) Explain the terms : RSHF, GSHF and ERSHF. [6]

b) An air conditioned space is to be maintained at 25°C D.B.T and 50%

RH. The other data given is as follows :

i) Out door conditions : 40°C DBT & 50% RH.

ii) RSH = 25 kW, RLH = 5 kW 20% of fresh air is introduced and

80% of supply air is recirculated on mass basis. The bypass factor

of cooling coil is 0.15.

Determine (1) Supply air flow rate (2) Outside air sensible heat

(3) Out side air latent heat (4) ERSHF.

Give schematic layout and show the process on psychrometric chart. [10]

Q4) Explain any three : [18]

a) Sources of noise in air conditioning plant.

b) Design of duct by velocity reduction method.

c) Types of grills, diffusers and wall registers.

d) Enthalpy deviation curves.

SECTION - II

Q5) Explain with neat layout of A/c systems used for : [18]a) Automobiles.

b) Railway Coach.

c) Air Craft.

Mention their typical spectifications.

Q6) Write notes on (any three) of the followings : [18]a) Conventional and Laminar flow clean rooms.

b) Air locks, Air curtains and Air showers.

c) Air cleaning and Air filtering devices.

Q7) a) Explain the typical layout of hot water system. [8]b) Compare costs of heating for a conference room for which 50,000 kJ/hr

of heating is required using the following systems : [8]i) Vapour compression heat pump system , COP = 3 & Electricity

charges Rs. 5/kW-h.

ii) Direct heating using fuel. Fuel charges Rs. 30/lit. sp. gravity of

oil = 0.87, Heating value = 42000 kJ/kg and combustion

efficiency = 0.8.

iii) Using Electric heating, charges Rs. 5/kW-h.

Q8) a) Explain the thermodynamics of evaporative cooling. Discuss the

different types of evaporative coolers used in practice. [10]b) Explain the working of a humidostat with a neat sketch. [6]

Q9)Explain the following : [16]a) Series and parallel operation of fans.

b) Sources of infiltration air.

c) Need of ventilation air.


[3765] - 63

M.E. (Mech) (Design Engineering)

MACHINE STRESS ANALYSIS







SECTION - I

Q1) a) Investigate the validity of stress function [8]

2cosr

ccrcrc 2

43

22

41 ⎟

⎠⎞⎜

⎝⎛ +++=φ

Where ‘r’ and ‘θ’ are polar co-ordinates.

b) How do you differentiate between plane stress and plane strain problems.

Give examples of each. [8]

Q2) a) A cantilever beam of uniform cross-section is loaded by a concentrated

force at it’s tip. Determine the deflection under the point of application

of the force by using Castigligno’s theorem. [8]

b) Explain Rayleigh Ritz method for determining deflection of beam.[4]

c) State the theorem of virtual work and least work. [4]

Q3) a) Determine the location of the shear center ‘O’ of a beam of uniform

thickness of 5 mm having the cross section as shown in the fig. 0.1.[12]

b) Explain the term shear centre and it’s importance. [4]

Q4) a) The mean dimensions of the two cells of a thin walled twin celled

sections are 60 × 30 mm and 30 mm square. Thickness are t1 = 3 mm,

t2 = 6 mm and t

3 = 4 mm. For an applied torque of 540 N-m determine

the Shear stress in each section and the angle of twist per meter length

(take G = 80 GPa). [10]

(Refer fig no. 2)

b) Give the procedure to analyse a thin rectangular member subjected to a

torque ‘t’. [6]

Q5) Write short note on : [18]a) Stresses in rotating disc with varying thickness.

b) Saint Venant’s principle.

c) Airy’s stress function and it’s significance in stress analysis.

SECTION - II

Q6) a) Derive from fundamentals the expression for contact stresses between

two rollers with parallel axis under compressive loads. [10]b) What are the different methods of analysing the contact stress problems?

[6]

Q7) a) What are the different parameters that influences the output of strain

gauge. [4]b) What is brittle coating method? Explain. [6]c) How strain gauges are arranged to obtain various strain rossettes? [6]

Q8) Derive the expression for the bursting pressure of tube in terms of inner and

outer radii and properties of tube materials. List the assumptions made in

derivation. [16]

Q9) a) Obtain shape factor for circular cross section of radius ‘R’. [6]b) Derive fundamental differential equation for cylindrical bending of

rectangular plate with uniform leading damped at edges with usual

notations. [10]

Q10)Write short notes on : [18]a) Isoclinics and Isocromatics.

b) Spring back effect.

c) Stress intensity factor and stress concentration factor.


[3765] - 95

M.E. (E&T/C) (Instrumentation)

HIGH PERFORMANCE NETWORK

(2004 Revised Course) (504109) (Elective - I)Time : 3 Hours] [Max. Marks : 100







SECTION - I

Q1) a) Explain various networks topologies and with the help of examples

explain how topologies can be decided based on the network node

size and placement. [8]

b) Compare Distributed and Centralized data networks. [8]

Q2) a) Explain the system architecture of VoIP. [8]

b) Describe H.323 protocol stack and protocol interworking Architecture.

[8]

Q3) a) Explain the following terms in reference to storage networks : ‘Backup’

and ‘Mirroring’. [8]

b) Compare Fiber channel attached storage and IP based storage Network.

[8]

Q4) Write short notes on any three : [18]

a) PSTN-IP Network Architecture.

b) IP telephoney.

c) SAN.

d) Routing resources and algorithms.

SECTION - II

Q5) a) What is Quality of Service? What are the requirement for QoS? Explain

what the techniques employed to ensure QoS. [8]

b) Explain the layered architecture of CDMA 2000. [8]

Q6) a) What is Spread Spectrum System? Explain DS-SS scheme in detail.[8]

b) Explain with an example the LZ77 compression and decompression

algorithm. [8]

Q7) a) What are the requirements of Public key Cryptography? Explain any

one Public Key Encryption algorithm. [8]

b) Describe the various categories of security attacks with an example for

each. [8]

Q8) Write short notes any three : [18]

a) RAID.

b) Circuit switching and Packet switching.

c) Network security.

d) Broadband access physical media.

!"#$

! " # $% &% '( %) * +( ("$$ , - "$&$$ $$. %$/"

!" #$

% % % % % %

&' ()*+, # -

()*+.% / ()*

) ()* & 0

) ()*+. 12&03(#3&)0#

4 5 & 6 ( 0

5 2$ 7 +*+8

2$

&*

&

* )

) 9 2$:,;<=>; ,?

/ .@<.@+(A.? #

4 7()*+,;;; B& 52


[3765]-139 M.E. (Electronics) (Digital System)NETWORK SECURITY SYSTEMS

(Revised 2002 Course )Time :3 Hours] [Max. Marks : 100

Instructions to the candidates:1) Answer any three questions from each section.2) Answers to the two sections should be written in separate books.3) Neat diagrams must be drawn wherever necessary.4) Figures to the right indicate full marks.5) Use of electronic calculator is allowed.6) Assume suitable data, if necessary.

P1656

SECTION - I

Q1) a) Give the classification of Security Services. Explain model of conventionalcryptosystem. [9]

b) What is the purpose of the S-Boxes in DES? Explain the S-Box designcriteria. Explain the strengths of DES in brief. [9]

Q2) a) What properties a hash function H must have for message authentication?Explain simple hash function. [8]

b) What requirements should a Digital Signature scheme satisfy? What arethe properties a digital signature should have? What are some threatsassociated with a direct digital signature scheme. [8]

Q3) a) What are three broad categories of applications of Public-KeyCryptosystems? What requirements must a Public-Key Cryptosystemfulfill to be a secure algorithm? [8]

b) Perform Encryption and Decryption using the RSA algorithm for thefollowing. [8]i) p=3, q=11, e=7, M=5ii) p=5, q=11, e=3, M=9

Q4) a) What problem was Kerberos designed to address? In the context ofKerberos, what is a realm . What are the principal differences betweenversion 4 and version 5 of Kerberos? [8]

b) Explain X.509 authentication procedures in brief. [8]

P.T.O.

[3765]-139 2

SECTION - II

Q5) a) Describe in brief the principal services provided by PGP. [8]b) Explain S/MIME in brief. [8]

Q6) a) What services are provided by IPSec? What parameters identify anSA and what parameters characterize the nature of a particular SA?[8]

b) Describe Secure Electronic Transaction (SET) in brief. [8]

Q7) a) Explain the types of firewalls. [8]b) What protocols comprise SSL? List and briefly define the parameters

that define SSL Session state and SSL Connection state? [8]

Q8) Write short notes (Any Three) : [18]a) Virus Countermeasures.b) Password Selection Strategies.c) Encapsulating Security Payload. (ESP)d) Network Management Security.

# # # #


[3765] - 155M.E. (Electrical) (Control System)

NONLINEAR CONTROL SYSTEM (2002 Course)


1) Answer any two questions from each section.2) Answers to the two sections should be written in separate books.3) Neat diagrams must be drawn wherever necessary.4) Figures to the right indicate full marks.5) All questions carry equal marks.6) Use of logarithmic tables slide rule, Mollier charts, electronic pocket


SECTION - I

Q1) a) How are the nonlinearities classified? Give examples of each type of

nonlinearity. [8]

b) Explain the peculiar characteristics which are present in nonlinear control

system. [9]

c) Give advantages and disadvantages of describing function method and

isocline method to plot phase plane trajectory. [8]

Q2) a) Classify various singular points and discuss their significance. [8]

b) Explain delta method of constructing phase plane trajectory for a given

control system. [9]

c) The system is given by

d 2x/dt2 + 0.5 dx/dt – 2x = 0

Draw phase plane trajectory for starting point dt

dx = 0, x = 1. [8]

Q3) a) Derive describing function for saturation. [8]

b) In a unity feed back control system ON-OFF relay is connected in

cascade with forward path transfer function

)1()2(50

)(++

=sss

sG [17]

i) Derive describing function for the system.

ii) Determine the frequency and limit cycle if it exists.

iii) Comment on stability.

SECTION - II

Q4) a) Define terms in the sense of Liapunov [8]

i) Stability.

ii) Asymptotic stability.

iii) Global Asymptotic stability.

iv) Instability.

b) Test the following function for positive definiteness

2x12 + 4x2

2 + 5x32 + x1x2 – 2x2x3. [8]

c) Explain briefly : [9]

i) Positive definite scalar function.

ii) Negative definite scalar function.

iii) Positive semi definite scalar function.

iv) Negative semi definite scalar function.

Q5) a) Explain : [16]

i) Popov method.

ii) Circle criteria.

b) Explain krasovski method to assess the stability of equilibrium point.

[9]

Q6) a) An autonomous system is given below [9]

⎥⎦

⎤⎢⎣

⎡⎥⎦

⎤⎢⎣

⎡−−

=⎥⎦

⎤⎢⎣

⎡

2

1

2

1

32

10

x

x

x

x

Examine stability using Liapunov theorem.

b) What is adaptive control system? Discuss different types of adaptive

control system. [8]

c) For linear time invariant system dx/dt = Ax, derive the expression

ATP + PA = – Q

Where P & Q are square symmetric positive definite matrices. [8]


[3765] - 164

M.E. (Electrical) (Power Systems)

POWER SYSTEM MODELLING







SECTION - I

Q1) a) Discuss need for modelling a power system. [12]

b) Discuss role played by different components used for power system

modelling. [13]

Q2) With reference to modelling of non-electrical components, discuss :

a) Modelling of boiler. [8]

b) Modelling of steam and hydro turbines. [9]

c) Governor system. [8]

Q3) Write short notes on :

a) Transformer modelling. [8]

b) Transmission line modelling. [9]

c) Load modelling. [8]

SECTION - II

Q4) a) Discuss development of synchronous machine model required for

dynamic studies. [12]

b) Explain current and flux linkage models using park’s transformation.[13]

Q5) a) Discuss simplified view of excitation control. [13]

b) Explain primitive system used for excitation system modelling. [12]

Q6) Write short notes on :

a) Excitation control system with alternator. [8]

b) Excitation configuration. [8]

c) Simple model required for steady state analysis of synchronous machine.

[9]

!" #$%#!%& %& '" (!)**) + *)*)

! " # $% &% '( %) * +( ("$$

!

"

#

$% &%

"

,-

'()(

! *

+


[3765]-169 M.E. (Electrical) (Power Systems) POWER SYSTEM DYNAMICS (Revised Course 2002) (503207)


1) Answer any two questions from each section.2) Answers to the two sections should be written on separate answer books.3) Figures to the right indicate full marks.4) Use of pocket electronic calculator is allowed.5) Assume suitable data, if necessary and state clearly the same.

P1666

SECTION - I

Q1) a) Define steady state power limit of a power system. Discuss the differentmeasures employed to improve this limit. [10]

b) An alternator is delivering 55% of Pmax to an infinite bus through atransmission line. A fault occurs such that the new maximum power is40% of the original subsequent to the clearance of fault, the maximumpower that can be delivered is 85% of the original maximum value.

i) Determine the critical clearing angle; [8]ii) If the fault is cleared at δ = 75°, find the maximum value of

δ

forwhich the machine swings around its equilibrium position. [7]

Q2) a) Discuss the effects of saliency and saturation on steady state stability ofa salient pole alternator. [8]

b) An alternator with E1 = 1.35 pu and x1 = 0.68 pu feeds power to anothersynchronous machine with x2 = 0.5 pu and E2 = 1 pu through atransmission line whose

π

- equivalent circuit parameters are xe = j 1.1 puand xs = xr = – j 5.2 p.u. Estimate the steady state power limit for thesystem. [12]

c) Discuss the conditions and reasons for voltage instability in a power system.[5]

Q3) Write short notes on the following :a) Pre-calculated swing curves; [8]b) Equal Area criterion and its applications. [9]c) Islanding in power system. [8]

P.T.O.

[3765]-169 2

SECTION - II

Q4) a) A synchronous generator is capable of developing a maximum power of400MW/phase. It is operating at a load angle of 10° in steady state. Byhow much can the input shaft power be increased suddenly without lossof stability. Assume that Pemax will remain constant. [10]

b) Discuss the dynamic stability of SMIB system where the finite machine isunregulated and is subjected to small impact. How is the same affected,if damper windings are provided in the machine. [15]

Q5) a) Explain Euler’s modified method. [10]b) The kinetic energy stored in the rotor of a 50 MVA, 50 Hz alternator

is 200 MJ. The generator has an internal voltage of 1.18 pu and isconnected to an infinite bus through a reactor of 0.25 pu. The voltageof the infinite bus 1.0 p.u. The generator is supplying rated powerwhen a 3-phase short-circuit occurs on the line. Subsequently theCBS operate and the reactance between the generate and bus becomes0.45 p.u. Using the Euler’s modified method, determine the swingcurve for the machine for a time of 0.3 seconds before the fault iscleared. Take h = 0.1 second. [15]

Q6) Write short notes on the following :a) Power system stabilisers; [8]b) Classical multimachine model for dynamic studies and its drawbacks.

[8]c) Methods to improve transient stability of a power system. [9]

# # # #

!"#$%&$''&$

!" #$ #" % &

' # # $%# % () %##! *+ ,) ) $$ - $$" *"$ . /! !" 0 1 $$$ $$#2 %$3 *

!"

Δ#$%#&''$&('%&') * +,+-./"0"

1 10"

23&''1&,*0&-*&*' 4 4"

"

"

5 ! "

45

6 5" #785#" 0 1091:" % " ;<"

0 ! "

1 "

= >?%! "

#↓ :

' , * - @ ) ( A' ' ' ' ', ' ' ' ' '* ' '- '@ ' ') '( ' ' 'A '

B/"(@ "

1"2"C"5":"5" !"

! !D"

6 <" 10" 1" 51"E"1" %"


[3765]-184 M.E. (Production)

HUMAN FACTORS IN DESIGN & MANUFACTURING(Elective - I) (Revised Course 2002)


1) Answer any three questions from each section.2) Answers to the two sections should be written in separate books.3) Neat diagrams must be drawn wherever necessary.4) Figures to the right indicate full marks.5) Use of logarithmic tables,slide rule Mollier charts, electronic pocket calculator


P1669

SECTION - I

Q1) a) Explain Analytical Hierachy Process (AHP) for deciding the weightagesof different alternatives with suitable illustration. [10]

b) Explain ‘ERP’ system. [8]

Q2) a) Explain ‘Digraph’ theory and state its uses. [8]b) Explain ‘MRPI’ operating system with inputs. [8]

Q3) a) Explain ‘product data architecture’ [8]b) Explain the product design and development stage of PLC. Explain

concurrent engineering. [8]

Q4) Explain the following terms in relation to supply chain management.a) Procurement cycle. [5]b) Manufacturing support cycle. [6]c) Physical distribution cycle. [5]

SECTION - II

Q5) a) Explain the principles of motion economy related with :i) Use of human body. [6]ii) Design of tool and equipment. [4]

b) Explain MMH. [8]

P.T.O.

[3765]-184 2

Q6) Explain various factors that affect visual discriminations. [16]

Q7) a) Explain the design of work surfaces height ini) Seated position. [6]ii) Standing position. [6]

b) Explain work and rest cycle. [4]

Q8) Write short notes on :a) Design of cranks and hand wheels. [6]b) Design of knobs for producing torque. [5]c) Design of automobile brake and accelerator pedals. [5]

# # # #

SECTION - I

Q1) a) Describe the basic NFS architecture for UNIX systems with the help ofa neat diagram. [8]

b) Describe the system architecture of Amoeba. State in brief the designgoals of Amoeba. [8]

Q2) a) Describe the general architecture of a DSM system with the help of aneat diagram. State in brief the design issues of a DSM. [8]

b) Describe the Chandy-Misra-Haas algorithm for deadlock detection. Statethe advantages of this algorithm. [8]

Q3) a) Describe how threads of a process are synchronized in Mach. [8]

b) Prove that the existence of a cycle in a general resource allocationgraph is a necessary but not a sufficient condition for the existence of adeadlock. [8]

Q4) a) Discuss in detail the major issues in designing a distributed operatingsystem. [10]

b) Discuss the reasons why distributed computing systems are gainingpopularity. [8]


[3765]-191M.E. (Computer Engineering)

DISTRIBUTED OPERATING SYSTEMS(510102) (Revised Course 2002)


Instructions to the candidates :1) Answer any three questions from each section.2) Answers to the two sections must be written on separate answer books.3) Draw sketches wherever necessary.4) Figures to the right indicate full marks.

P1672

P.T.O.

[3765]-191 - 2 -

SECTION - II

Q5) a) Describe Ricart-Agrawala’s algorithm for implementing mutualexclusion in a distributed environment. Discuss the advantages anddrawbacks of this algorithm. [8]

b) Discuss the relative advantages and disadvantages of the various datalocating mechanisms that may be used in a DSM system that uses theNRMB strategy. [8]

Q6) a) Describe the Kerberos system architecture with a help of a neat diagram.State the details of the Kerberos authentication protocol. [8]

b) Discuss the relative advantages and disadvantages of implementing athread package in user space and in the kernel. [8]

Q7) a) Discuss the desirable features of a good distributed file system. [8]

b) How is group communication implemented in Chorus? [8]


a) Distributed Object Model.

b) Consistency Models.

c) Remote Method Invocation.

d) Bully Algorithm.

!"##$

!" !"# $% &% '( %) *+ ,( (!$$ - %$.! *

!" "" #$

"%&

'(&)*"(

# '" &

# #! +",+, , " ! # ## !""

"" # "#" " "$ *- - -

/0

. #

. #"#

" #". #

/0

1 "" #)$+&21++2/ 22

""" . " #

"" " # #""&(13%10 #"#)#"" #4%2,44 ". "4%2, " "# )

"" #$ & , ")

'


[3765]-196 M.E. (Computer Engg)

NETWORK SECURITY (2002 Course ) (Elective - I)


1) Answer any three questions from each section.2) Answers to the two sections should be written in separate answer books.3) Neat diagrams must be drawn wherever necessary.4) Assume suitable data, if necessary.

P1676

SECTION - I

Q1) a) Explain various types of passive and active attacks and security threats.[8]

b) How the security services i.e. confidentiality, integrity and availability aresufficient to deal with the threats of disclosure, disruption, deceptionand usurpation. [10]

Q2) a) Discuss in brief any method for key management in public key encryption.[8]

b) What are the roles of the Oakley key determination protocol and ISAKMPin IPSec? Explain. [8]

Q3) a) Explain the format of the X. 509 certificate. [8]b) Explain the fundamental idea of HMAC. What are the objectives of

HMAC? [8]

Q4) a) Comment on the difference between SHA and MD5 algorithms. Why isSHA more secure than MD5. [8]

b) Explain RSA crypto system. What is one way function and trapdoors inthe system. [8]

P.T.O.

[3765]-196 2

SECTION - II

Q5) Explain the security implications of the following group policy settings.Mention atleast one attack vector per setting. Also mention recommendedparameters. [16]a) Accounts : Rename administrator account.b) Audit : Audit the use of Backup & Restore privilege.c) Devices : Prevent users from installing printer drivers.d) Deny access to this computer from the network.

Q6) a) Describe in detail how an executable infecting computer virus mightoppend itself to an executable. What changes must it make to theexecutable and why. [8]

b) Explain how digital signature works. Why are hash functions used indigital signatures? Can they be attacked? How? [10]

Q7) a) How Trajan Horse collects the information from network? How doesworm-propagate? Explain. [8]

b) Enlist the services provided by secure socket layer SSL. Also explainprotocols defined in SSL. [8]

Q8) a) Describe packet filtering routes in detail. What are positive andnegative effects of firewall. [8]

b) Explain how Elliptic curve system works. Using ECS, explain howsecrete keys are exchanged and messaged one encrypted. [8]

# # # #


[3765]-202 M.E. (Computer Engg)

APPLIED ALGORITHMS (2002 Course )


1) Answer any three questions from each section.2) Answers to the two sections should be written in separate answer - books.3) Neat diagrams must be drawn wherever necessary.4) Figures to the right indicate full marks.5) Assume suitable data, if necessary.

P1678

SECTION - I

Q1) a) Give an algorithm to detect whether a given undirected graph contains acycle, if the graph contains a cycle, then your algorithm should outputone. The running complexity of your algorithm should be (m+n) for thegraph with n nodes and m edges. [10]

b) A Binary tree is rooted tree in which each node has at most two children.Show by induction that in any binary tree the number of nodes with twochildren is exactly one less than the number of leaves. [6]

Q2) a) Explain the Merge sort using divide and conquer approach. [4]b) Write an algorithm for Quick sort using divide and conquer approach.

What is the best case, average case and worst case complexity? Onwhat input data does Quick sort exhibit its worst case behavior? showwith example for each best, Average and worst case. [12]

Q3) The input is a set of jobs j1, j2, .......jN each of which takes one time unit tocomplete. Each job ji earns di Rs if it is completed by time limit ti, but nomoney if completed after the time limit. [16]a) Give an O(N2) greedy algorithm to solve the problem.b) Modify your algorithm to obtain an O (N log N) time bound.

Q4) a) By considering the complete graph with n vertices, show that the numberof spanning trees in an n vertex graph can be greater than 2n-1-2 . [8]

b) Suppose you are given a connected graph G, with edge costs that are alldistinct. Prove that G has a unique minimum spanning tree using Greedyapproach. [10]

P.T.O.

[3765]-202 2

SECTION - II

Q5) a) The longest common subsequence problem is as follows : Given twosequences A = a1, a2, ....... aM and B = b1, b2, ........ bN, find thelength k of the longest sequence C = c1, c2, ...... ck such that C is asubsequence of both A and B an example. [12]A = dynamic.andB = programming.Then longest common subsequence ‘am’ and has length 2.Write an algorithm using dynamic programming for the same abovegiven problem,and algorithm should have the complexity O (MN).

b) What is principle of optimality? Which algorithmic strategy use thisprinciple? Explain with suitable example. [6]

Q6) Consider the problem of placing eight queens on an (eight by eight) chessboard. Two queens are said to attack each other if they are on same row,column or (not necessarily main) diagonal. [16]

a) Give randomize algorithm to place eight non attacking queens on theboard.

b) Give backtracking algorithm to solve the problem.c) Compare the running time of both the algorithms design in (a) and (b).

Q7) One form of the Knapsack problem is as follows : Given a set ofinteger A = a1, a2, ...... aN and an integer k, is there a subset of Awhose sum is exactly k? [16]a) Give an algorithm that solves the Knapsack problem in O(NK) time.b) Why does this not show that p = NP?

Q8) a) Write an algorithm for Breadth First Search algorithm in Graph usingsuitable data structure. What is the complexity of the algorithm? If wehave not use this data structure can still we implement the samealgorithm, if yes what is its complexity? [8]

b) Explain the branch and bound algorithmic strategy for solving theproblem, take an example of traveling salesman problem using branchand bound. [8]

# # # #

!"#!$#!#% &'()**+(

! " # $ %& &$'' ( )& ' * +, - $.!& '''/'&.'&/ .'&!! ''0 '$ +''+

!"

# $ " "%

SECTION - I

Q1) a) What is RAD model? Explain the need for it in current industry scenario.What are major issues with this model? [8]

b) Describe a process framework in your own word. When we say thatframework activities are applicable to all projects, does this mean thatsame work tasks are applied for all projects, regardless of size andcomplexity? [8]

Q2) a) What is prototyping in software development? Provide example ofsoftware development project that would be amenable to prototyping.And provide example of software development project that would bemore difficult to prototype. [8]

b) What is software architecture? Enlist important characteristics of themodel of your choice with a suitable diagram. [8]

Q3) a) What are the advantages and disadvantages of developing software inwhich quality is “good enough”? That is, what happens when weemphasize development speed over product quality? [8]

b) Explain the meaning of reliability or technical metrics and discuss anytwo metrics in detail that help in the assessment of system performance.

[8]


[3765]-238M.E. (Information Technology)

SOFTWARE ENGINEERING(510121) (Course 2002)


Instructions to the candidates :1) Answer any three questions from each section.2) Answers to the two sections should be written in separate books.3) Neat diagrams must be drawn wherever necessary.4) Figures to the right indicate full marks.5) Assume suitable data, if necessary.

P1686

P.T.O.

[3765]-238 - 2 -

Q4) a) Are there characteristics of system that cannot be established duringsystem engineering activities? Describe the characteristics, if any andexplain why a consideration of them must be delayed until laterengineering steps. [8]

b) Explain in detail function point metric. List all the values adjustmentfactor. What are the metrics for specification quality? [8]

Q5) a) What questions need to be answered in order to develop a project planaccording to W5HH principles? [10]

b) What is PERT / CPM technique? How is this technique useful insoftware project planning? Explain it with suitable example. [8]

SECTION - II

Q6) a) Define dependability of a Computer System. What are the four principledimensions of dependability? [8]

b) An important communication principle states “prepare before youcommunicate”. How should this preparation manifest itself in the earlywork that you do? What work products might result as a consequenceof early preparation? [8]

Q7) a) What are design Patterns? What are different elements of designpattern? [8]

b) What is feasibility study? Develop a checklist for attributes to beconsidered when the “feasibility” of a system or product is to beevaluated. Discuss the interplay among attributes and attempt to providea method for grading each so that a quantitative “feasibility number”may be developed. [8]

Q8) a) Describe Object Oriented Software life cycle model with the help ofdiagram. State the advantages and disadvantages. [8]

b) An analysis rule of thumb is that the model “should focus onrequirements that are visible within the problem or business domain”.What types of requirements are not visible in these domains? Providefew examples? [8]

Q9) a) Explain why an object oriented approach to software developmentmay not be suitable for real time systems. [8]

b) Suggest why it is important to make a distinction between developingthe user requirements and developing system requirements in therequirements engineering process. [8]

Q10)Write a short note on : [18]

a) Buy decision tree.

b) Reference Architecture.

c) Outsourcing.

[3765]-238 - 3 -


[3765] - 240M.E. CSE (Information Technology)

NET CENTRIC COMPUTING(Revised Course 2002) (510122)

! " # ! "$#

% & ' ( '& &

)* '&&+

, -* * "((

P1687

.

.% ! " " " ! "!

! " " #

. $ #"# # % # &'( )##! #"# *)#! # # + ",-,-./" 0#"# 0# $#

# 1 ## % * # 0#" /# 0#""# 0#"

2" 2 ##

., 30) 4" # $ " 5" 5""

./ 0), " 6 0), " # # "#

04$64$

.0 "" ! "" 786%

# 4 " /

.1 ! 0$9 "

.2 30) $:" %$);< $ " #


[3765]-245 M.E. CSE (IT)

OBJECT ORIENTED SYSTEM(Elective - I) (2002 Course)


1) Question 1 and 5 are compulsory. Answer any other two questions from eachsection.

2) Answers to the two sections should be written in separate books.3) Neat diagrams must be drawn wherever necessary.4) Figures to the right indicate full marks.5) Assume suitable data, if necessary.

P1689

SECTION - I

Q1) a) Draw a class diagram for the following system: “PARKING LOT”for your college is multistoreyed with two wheeler parking on thefloor one, visitor parking and VIP parking at ground floor. Carkparking is on upper floors. Employees can pay quarterly or yearly.Visitors pay on a daily basis. System has a GUI to show floorwiseplan, show free slots, cars location. Members use swipe card toenter/exit the parking lot. System can help locate free slots, can reservecars for VIP members, generate space utilization reports too. [10]

b) With examples of your choice illustrate the following concepts.

i) Sequential substates.ii) Object flow in an activity diagram. [8]

Q2) a) Draw a sequence diagram for the usecase described below :Consider the usecase “Buy an insurance policy”. Key steps of theuse case could be to get customer details, get customer needs, offerpolicy list and detail of various policies available. Based on customerchoice of the policy, he is made a policy member and first premium ispaid by customer by credit card (validation needed). State whateverassumptions you make in this use case “Buy an insurance policy”.[8]

P.T.O.

[3765]-245 2

b) From the above insurance system example, with additional assumptionsif needed, show the following concepts in context of a collaborationdiagram. Concepts : Message nesting, link, iteration, guard condition,creation of object and actor. You could draw a collaboration diagram toshow all concepts in the same diagram or show small collaborationdiagram parts to show the above concepts. [8]

Q3) An organization has employees working at various departments. Theorganization plans to have an employee record maintenance system. Theemployees are assigned unique employee-number based on which the detailsof every employee are recorded. The employees are working at variouspositions in the departments and accordingly the salary would be computed.The employee receives awards/increments/promotions based on theirperformance appraisal.The performance appraisal of an employee can be done by Senior or Juniorcolleagues. The feedback should be collected on a monthly/yearly basis. Themanagement receives this progress report about every employee. Themanagement introduces certain training programs, workshops to improve qualityof the employees.Trace the possible queries and reports regarding the above problem. Clearlystate scope, problem partitions and Analyze the problem and develop. Usecase diagrams for all scenarios, Collaboration diagrams for any three scenariosand class diagram for the target system. [16]

Q4) a) Draw a package diagram for the hypothetical ‘Railway ReservationSystem’. [8]

b) With examples of your choice illustrate the following concepts. [8]i) Sequential substates.ii) Object flow in an activity diagram.

SECTION - II

Q5) a) A window in a window management system can be displayed in oneof the three states : maximized, where it takes up the entire screen;normal, where it is displayed as a bordered window with a given sizeand position on the screen; and iconized where it is displayed as asmall icon. When a window is opened, it will be displayed as a normalwindow, unless minimize on use has been selected, in which case itwill be displayed as an icon. A normal window and an icon can bemaximized; a maximized window and a normal window can beminimized, or reduced to an icon. Maximized windows can be restoredto their normal size, and icons can be restored to the size they had

before they were minimized. Icons and normal windows can be moved,and normal windows can also be resized. No matter how it is displayed,a window can always be closed. Draw a state diagram expressing thesefacts about the display of windows. [12]

b) Explain the significance of stereotypes, tagged value and constraintsand how they are represented in UML. [6]

Q6) An information system is to be designed for a car rental company. Potentialcustomers phone up the company for advice and information. The bookingclerks field all calls. Many interested parties remain anonymous, becausetheir personal data is not registered. Customers reserve cars. Reservationand customer data are accepted by the booking clerks and entered into thereservation system. The customer is given a reservation number. Driverscollect reserved cars at the branch office. Some customers are companiersand therefore they will send a particular driver to pick up a car. Thecustomer service clerk takes the agreement from the customer file, checksthe details and amends the agreement if necessary. The vehicle documentsand keys are hander over to the driver. On return the cars are parked in thereturn car park and the keys and vehicle documents are received backfrom the driver. Before the driver is permitted to leave, the car is checkedover for any damage.

a) Develop a use case model for this example.b) Think about whether the actors you have identified are beneficiaries

of the use cases. Think about including uses and extends relationships;are they necessary at this stage?

c) Model one of the interactions with either a collaboration diagram or asequence diagram. [16]

Q7) a) How Objects are identified? What are the categories of Objects? HowObject behaviour is determined? [8]

b) What is the significance of Incremental and Evolutionary approach? Howit supports Component building? [8]

Q8) a) What is the importance of Workflows in a development process? Whatactivities are performed in Elaboration and Construction phases ofunified Process? What is meant by Major and Minor milestone? [10]

b) Explain ‘Life of Unified Process’. [6]

# # # #

[3765]-245 3

!"#$%$&'()$

! "#$% !&"' "'(

) *'!+!% $ " , +!-$ "

!"#!$ %

& % #'

()

* + , - ./ -#

%%

(-0 ( )

( *

.#

( '

( #,

- 0

1, *21 ()* )

( 2/

#12+(

*

& , # # 3 ###

( ' &

- 0

!"#

! " # $ % $ $&" ' ( ) * +, ,"&&

! " !

! ! #

$""%$&#'(#

! # )" &# #!"

*#! ###

+

,)""

-#

(" !"

"####

)!#

'!)#!

! !! ) #

&#!!.! &#

*#)"! &#

+

-/#!

0#%0"

'"

!" # #$$%&'()$*)$

! " # $% &% '( %) * + " $( %$ $ $,$$ , $& $$

%$ $$- %$,"

→

! " # #$ %& $% ' ( )* +, -., --/

0-. ,01 //, -*+

1). -/+ *2 -.

A 3-1+ 4 $

B 302 4 %5653.-)% 7

8#

./

98 -

:

;

9 ! <

9 ( . .* -. -* 1. 1* / /* , * ** 2. 6 . * 11 12 10 11 -+ -* -. , / .=-.

> : → ∞ >?

@6AB

$ 1* ..1*: .../ ∈3./)$ /21C -/:6 @ 3../-D 3.---0:6

9 3.+,)2:6<

3-/26

>4

> :

&


[3765] - 265

M.E. (Chemical)

PROCESS MODELLING AND SIMULATION (109103)

(2002 Course )


1) Answer any 3 question from each section.



4) Use of algorithmic tables slide rule, Mollier charts, electronic pocket calculator andsteam tables is allowed.


P1694

! !

CBA kk ⎯→⎯⎯→⎯ 21

!" " #

$! ! % &'( ! !γ )γ

γ )γ

!"

" * +,(

)-./

)-,0/

)-1-

)--2

344

. 5 1 0.,- 5, .0+ 0 -,5-- 5-- 2- .0+ ,

6 7 #$8 %9:99%669:

% !3

' '" ;<:=#8$=

!"#$% %&% '%&(()*+,(,,( -.

! " # $% & % '( %) * +( ("$$

!

" !!#$$$%&!#'(&)#*!+,$$%& !

%%

-

.

) /

.

0'1

0 !

!

0!%

SECTION - I

Q1) The following table gives the cost-duration data for a small constructionproject. [18]

Normal Crash

Duration Cost Duration Costin days in Rs. in days in Rs.

1–2 18 6000 13 8500

1–3 23 11000 18 16000

1–4 9 15000 9 15000

2–3 11 11000 11 11000

2–4 16 41000 12 42000

3–5 13 9000 8 13500

5–6 – – – –

2–6 7 3000 7 3000

6–7 13 11000 8 21000

4–7 13 9000 11 13000

7–8 9 16000 9 16000

5–8 9 21000 9 21000


[3765]-402M.E. (Civil) (Construction and Management)

MANAGEMENT AND PROJECT PLANNING IN CONSTRUCTION(2008 Course & 2002 Course)


Instructions to the candidates :1) Answer 3 questions from Section I and 3 questions from Section II.2) Answers to the two sections should be written in separate books.3) Neat diagrams must be drawn wherever necessary.4) Figures to the right indicate full marks.5) Use of logarithmic tables, slide rule, Mollier charts, electronic pocket


P1697

P.T.O.

Activityi–J

[3765]-402 - 2 -

a) Draw the network and identify the critical path.

b) Find the normal duration and the corresponding direct, indirect costsand total project cost. Indirect cost is Rs. 1000/- per day.

c) Carryout stage by stage compression and find the optimum durationand the corresponding costs.

d) Find the all crash solution.e) Plot a graph of costs verses time.

Q2) a) Explain the Repetitive project modelling and LOB technique, withexamples. [8]

b) How will you mobilize the site for the construction of a domesticairport? [8]

Q3) a) Explain the procedure for carrying out resource levelling andsmoothing. [8]

b) What are the applications of MIS to construction? [8]

Q4) a) Explain the work breakdown structure for the construction of acommercial building. [8]

b) What is the importance of training construction managers? [8]

SECTION - II

Q5) Discuss the various types of feasibilities that are needed to be conducted,before finalising any project, with the help of any case study. [18]

Q6) Which are the various mechanical electrical, plumbing andtelecommunication services needed on a major project? Indicate the detailsof the co-ordination necessary between these services and also with the civilworks. [16]

Q7) With examples, highlight the importance of assigning project managementconsultants on a major project. Detail out their role and responsibilitiesduring pre-tender and post-tender stage on a highway project. [16]

Q8) a) Explain utility of time-motion studies with an example. [8]

b) Discuss the various points to be considered in designing a financialscheme for workers. [8]

!"

! " # $ %&'( )"*' !

" +! " +, - ' - %* -. & /* *"(( 0 1 " (*-( 2 ((2(( 2('((

-( ((3 -(.

!

"

" # $ %

&% $ &% #

' & ()

*+ ,-.

/ 0 .

0

% 1

2

/

%

%

.

3 456 &% 7 893 5 3 +

$(

. "

*+ . . " , 7 1 7 ' "

!" # $ %& &# ' ()& ) " * ) ) +)) , )+

!"

#$"%"%""&' ()$ * +"

()%+* , - )./*"- & "- 0#"

&'1 + " - %$ "

- $+). *"

- #23345 "

! 67"

- 8 "

- 8 + +"7' + "

- 8 98 6

- 8 +! 6

8 "

- "

- %"

- : 1"

- (;7+"

- ! :< "

- 47 "

!

"#$%"#&'&(')*!++!

! " # $ %&'( )"*' !

" +! " +, - ' - %* -. & /* *"(( 0 1 " (*-( 2 ((2(( 2('((

-( ((3 -(.

! " # !

! " "$ $% !!

""&"' ! # ( "

"" ( "' " " )

*

(

!+&+#

! " ! "

!"#

, --./0.# #"1" 2 $ ! " .345 6) 7 " -. ) $%

,-. " , 34" "" (

,* ", %- , ! 8 * -" 2 "! !""

, .# -! ! (&( &-"

* ! ) !

9:! !; $%

* .<8=7>?"8 @8 >5 8 ".:558" 34 8 .@A45/ 8 " .>>83458 .>58555>5B 7 ! ?55!"

C"; $

-."

2

* 7&

1"-.#

* 7 "!



TQM IN CONSTRUCTION ( 2008 Course) (Elective)


1) Answers to the two sections should be written in separate books.2) Neat diagrams must be drawn wherever necessary.3) Figures to the right indicate full marks.4) Use of logarithmic tables slide rule, Mollier charts, electronic pocket calculator

and steam tables is allowed.5) Assume suitable data, if necessary.6) All questions are compulsory.

P1701

SECTION - I

Q1) With examples, explain why TQM is necessary in the Indian constructionsector. Explain the major aspects of TQM philosophy. [18]

Q2) With a case study, explain how the costs of defects are worked out for aconcrete pavement construction involving PQC, DLC and other components.

[16]

Q3) What is six sigma? How are the sigma levels indicated? Which are the variouscertification levels associated with six sigma and how are they achieved? Whatare advantages of six sigma technique? [16]

SECTION - II

Q4) As a quality incharge of a major construction project, you have decided toobserve the existing quality of bored, cast in situ pile constructions asregards the concreting activity, including the steel reinforcement, and suggestimprovements for the same. Explain : [18]a) Methodology devised by you to generate data as regards assessing

the existing status of the piling quality.b) Benchmarks you have set for various parameters related to RCC including

for the works, tolerances allowed. [Make relevant assumptions as regardsmix, reinforcement type, etc]

c) Preventive and remedial measures suggested, for improvement in future.

P.T.O.

[3765]-409 2

Q5) Explain with examples the eight principles involved in ISO (9001) : 2000 asapplied to a contractor’s organisation, executing bridge projects. [16]

Q6) Explain in brief the following : [16]

a) Role of top management in TQM.

b) Quality function deployment (QFD) and how to achieve it.

c) Categories of quality costs.

d) Application of PDCA in quality assurance.

!"#"$%&'($)*%*&%+

! "# ! "#$ %& '& () &* + ,) )"%% - . "%)&% / %%/%% /%'%%

&% %%0 &%/" +

!"

#

$%"

&"

'()

$#*$)

+ ,%-*+!./

!0 + ! ! 0!0! ! * .!! 1 !/ 2 0 . 34! / 5!/! 67/ 8 .67*0 +!.!

!0 + /

!

++.% # ( 9

7 %) %) %: #9 :) ## %& #& #& &); () (& (# 9# &)

< %) () ) )

2 ++00 /=! ./+0 >+?+!0! ! /2 ! ?+0/4! 0 @

= A% # ( 9

7 %% % #% % %: ## #9 #%; %" % #( #)< % #) %) %= %: % #9 ##

2 +! (! 7*B; 1 !7CC;/+! 0 / < 1 !0+! 0"

+/ 2 + 0! ;

A ! 7 ;

% %" # % %% %( %% ( %"9 %( " %%" #%

82 !!?%:C( -)%) !!!.0%D/;.00 ./

=?+ 03 E/4 + /

7 F/&)> + !/=!+ !1 0F/%)>/?+! 0!0 /8<. !+ ++!.0 ? /

G F 0+ !7 ;

) ) ) )%) #) &) 9:#) 9) :) &() %#) :: %))9) %#9 # %)9") %#: & %):&) %(# %)) %%#

85 +! 1

+ 2221

21 354Z xxxx ++=

!

%)

+.00? 7B /< 0!+. 0/+.000+.7/

7

%# C: #) #7 %9 %& %: 97

%: %& (# 9

7

: %) ) :

! +0 01 !. * %))!/

G 9 %) %( %& %

21 !. : #( ( %9

!" %% %#

21 !. # : #) 9& #9

;! +! 0 /

+! 0/%) 0

7 %) %9 && "# &% : :( # (9 #"! %% : & (& ## 9: % : "

4!! !! ! ! + !@

4+! 0 !!!0+ !@

! 4 !+! 01+ H! !.@400 .+0+! @


[3765] - 439M.E. Civil (Hydraulic Engineering)

REMOTE SENSING AND G.I.S. IN WATERRESOURCES ENGG. (2008 Course) (501304)


1) Answer any three questions from each section.2) Answers to the two sections should be written in separate books.3) Neat diagrams must be drawn wherever necessary.4) Figures to the right indicate full marks.5) Use of electronic pocket calculator is allowed.6) Assume suitable data, if necessary.

SECTION - I

Q1) a) With the help of sketches, explain any four types of aerial photographs.

[8]

b) Explain the phenomenon of energy interactions with earth features.

Also, state any two types of reflectors. [8]

Q2) a) Explain passive system of data acquisition. State any three equipments

used in passive system. [8]

b) Explain the interaction of multispectral imagery in remote sensing. [8]

Q3) a) Describe active system of data acquisition and explain any two basic

types of radar. [8]

b) Differentiate between analog and digital system of remote sensing.[8]


a) Image classification.

b) Indian remote sensing satellites.

c) Spectral response of natural earth surface features.

d) Interpretation of radar imagery.

SECTION - II

Q5) a) Explain concept of G.I.S. and state any four components of G.I.S.[8]

b) With help of sketch, explain classification & types of input data for

G.I.S. [8]

Q6) a) Differentiate between spatial data and non spatial data. [8]

b) State any four data sources for G.I.S. [8]

Q7) Write applications of remote sensing & G.I.S. in :

a) Crop yield and land use management. [8]

b) Watershed management. [8]


a) Georeferencing of GIS data.

b) Spatial data errors.

c) Raster Analysis.

d) Data quality in G.I.S.

!" #$$% &'()*

! " # $% & %$ '( %) * +( ("$$ , - $$%)$ $. / "$&$$ $$0 %$"

!"

! #

!

! #

#$$% % & % '

( )#

! #$$

! *)#%+,

!"

! &

! #)#

! -#$$

! " # $% & %$ '( %) * +( ("$$ , - $$%)$ $. / "$&$$ $$0 %$"

! " # $

% !! # $ " &

' ()*

+ ,-.% ,-' ! (/ ) -

% - -0' 1-230 -23

' - ' (" ' ' ! - ' # (/ +.

4-1- - 5--

+1*! - +*-

+--)6.+)67( % 2 /3 2

% (- - -

+ * %-3 8 '3 -(.

4 #"'

' ! " #

! " "

9 *

(- : - - !:% -" ! ;

% 4( - /

% 4(- /

% * ( /

+- % *

% -

+--0523.+3 <=--

+--6' %

+ &->

)

2?((

2

% -<

9=+-

14(

!"#$$%&# '%$(%")%&#"

! " # $% & %$ '( %) * +( ("$$ , - $$%)$ $. / "$&$$ $$0 %$"

!"#!"!! !

" $%%% $$$&'& !

()$* &+$$ ! ',&-.,$$/0!1$&,2!$&$2')345$+

"!! (( )

6!1(!789476

:..

":.;

<:&-+$$$

=1:$%%

:$,>?-&$>3

7@:$$.&&

"A> !'-

!

B

0'

" C!'!5!'!

DE=2:,F,>2)G*.,H"I!!B2)!B2"!

"!!@B'")" ( J I

&&;$$6!.;2')&.,>?-&>3

)! 19τ

2τ

:0αE&4Kα2θLH

'!!

C!'&.$21$*$*>?-&$>3!C!!

"A> !'-

C!7

D

B7!

C3

00

!"# $%$&'$'& ())*)+)

! " # $% & % ' ( ")*+*+*,-+*#+*.++'/* & 0+%$ $%1 - 2 $$%1$ $

!

"#

##

$

%& '( (

)*+,-*&##*+#. ((

/01(

/0(0(

/02#1(

(#(3(

/0(

(456"$0#(

7 ( ( 0-++,-%+,*8*9%

!"# $%%& ' %(%) *

! " # $% & % ' () %* +) )"$$ , - "$&$$ $$

!

"#$ ! % &

' ()*!*' +)(,!*' -)*!((

& .

/ 0

1

# 2 3

&

2 & . &4

'

#%

#

2 & "2 5

06789:6;86 8<δ=!& 6;8

>& & 6?8

#& &

! "# #"$!"!

! " # $% &% ' () %* +) )"$$ , - "$&$$ $$

!

" # $

% & ! '

(

)

*

+

" & , *

-

. # ) ,)

!

& !

&

. ! /

& , / . ,

& ) ,


[3765]-469 M.E. (Civil - Structures)

BIOMATERIALS & BIOMECHANICS ( 2008 Course) (Elective - IV)


Instructions to the candidates:1) Slove any Two questions from each section.2) Answers to the two sections should be written in separate answer books.3) Draw neat sketches be drawn if necessary.

P1714

SECTION - I

Q1) Solve any three :a) Write the composition of bone. [6]b) What are the mechanical properties of bone. [9]c) Write note on “tendon” and “ligament”. [6]d) What is an articular cartilage. Explain various tests to be carried out on

cartilages. [10]

Q2) a) Explain various criteria needed to compare the behaviour of elastic andviscoelastic material. [9]

b) Explain various types of reinforcements used in polymer compositesused as biomaterial. [9]

c) Write a note on ‘Polyamides’ and ‘Particulate composite’. [7]

Q3) a) Draw the sketch of elbow joint showing bone assembley. [7]b) Explain the mechanism of the elbow joint. [8]c) Write a note on ‘Bio inert and bio active ceramics’. [5]d) Bio degradation and Bio-resorption differentiate clearly. [5]

SECTION - II

Q4) Answer any three :a) Explain evaluation of elastic modulus in parallel loading for polymer matrix

composite; two phase continous fiber PCM and its strength evaluation.[8]

b) Explain the properties and characteristics of silicon rubber, polyethylene andultra high molecular weight polyethylene; with reference to biomedicalapplication. [9]

P.T.O.

[3765]-469 2

c) Explain the deterioration of polymer when used as bio material. [8]

d) Explain the structure of adult human cortical bone with reference to itsmechanical properties. [8]

e) Explain elastic behaviour of cortical bone. [8]

Q5) Answer any three :a) Sketch tibio - femoral contact area as a function of knee flexion angle.[8]b) Explain synovial joint. [8]c) Explain the types and technologies used for force measurement due

to body motion. [8]d) Derive joint force equation from free body diagram of hip joint and all

forces acting on joint. [9]e) Explain current status of Gait analysis. [8]

Q6) Answer any three :a) What are fundamental considerations in engineering design of

prosthesis. [8]b) What are the classes of prosthetic devices. Explain in short each.[8]c) Explain clinical trials, clinical protocol, investigational device exemption

and relese for bio material. [9]d) Explain mechanical failure of fixation device with reference to hip or

knee joint. [8]

# # # #


[3765] - 475

!"#!#!!!


! " # $ % &

P1715

!"#$%$ &'(''' )(''' #( *$+ &(''',

- ./ #0/ 0/'& 1' 2' 1''3 2' 44 &''5 &' 1 3''2 5' 5 1'1 3' 3 44

+0/ 1' )1

67

, $ * $

'()

8$ $

9 : /

+ * ,

# ;< =' >'807$%/ 12' 5''? 07$/ 5=> 33107$/ )' 1'@ ( /* $ + ;$

67

9 (/

!"A#$%$ 4 @ $3'(''' @(7$2'('''$@ &)(1'' ( &)('''$6 * ,

! "- 7$2'(''' 7$2('''% &3(''' &'('''6* )(''' =(115B< 1 28* 7$& 7$3+ / $ @ $

9

*@ C

67

9 , - $ $ C $ + $

#

+D-0+D- +D-

9 E;

67

9 &2 D- C86='''

#

@ F * * ,@* 6 -/ &43 3 1 &2&4> 3 1 )345 1 && 3)342 & 2 G541 1 && &G241 5 1 &2>4G 5 = 3G14) 3 3 )G4) G &5 35

97+/ $ $

# *( *(98+(%8+( / *$

#* $ %

67

9 ** F

9 6+ 97+#-

#

8 F*

*; *

67

8

9 - 6 F*

!"#$%#" &''()'*'

! " # $% &% '( %) * +( ("$$ , - "$(%$ $$.$$ .$&$$

%$ $$/ %$."

! "# $ $ %&'

#

() *$ + $),$#-.

/ 0 $) $ )

/ $ 1

$).-2

0/ 0

/!3+,4 0$)

/ $ 0

3 $ $ $ $ 3 "5!# 6! 7# 8# $ 5")9 :;<9)# :5 65 6% 67 6%#) *! ="%)<9)> =" !=":)<9)>?="3

'

3 ! @$ .

, 2$ +2@! A B

/ $

/ * '

& -$)

!

;

, # + $ / $0

# @$ @

C C

/ ; 0

$'

. $

2

&

!"" #!$% !&&"!'($)**#+,

! " ! "# $% &% '( %) *+ ,( (!$$ - . ! $(%$ / $$/$$ /$&$$

%$ $$0 %$/! *

! !" "# #$ $%

&' $ !$ " !

(' )

* # # + #!#!+ #"#"+ ####+ #$#$+ #%#%+ #,#,+

& # ! #! $# #$ - ,

' .' / ! )

( ' !$ ,$ !$ ,$ !!$

.' , - !$ " !

(' 0 1 ' 2' 34 )

2' 3 $! $" #! % #$ # ", "- !$ !,

2' 4 %$ %- #" "- ,, #- "$ " !$ $

(' 56 1 7' '

7 ! ! !! !" !# !$

&' $ # " !# ! %

8 ' # " - +% % !#

7' ' ' ' ' ' / ' 99 !:/'

'// '

&9( / ' /!$Ω ; '

< =1

' '

'

'' '

' / '' -!/ ''' ' !$6

'

'

6>?>;

* )

7

&

8

( '

!"#$#%#&! %"'(" )*+,)--)

! "#$% &! "# '( )* + ,( (-.. % / - .( ). . .$.. $ .0 ..

). ..$00+). & ).$- +1 ..! 0. +

!"# $ % & !& '( )$* '( !$+# ,$-(&$.

/!0' $1*$$

# &2 & %& 34) !!)$* ,& 4056 056 , 7 8# 9, 9 9, 9 :

7;#/004 < </

&/= &<</-

23

&/44 & /'0&/- > >/=6 8 /-3= <

/-

; 8 /0! #8/-? #

/0-

&

6 tb /3='

7 sb /-='4

& ,(/>*$

" :"/040$* >/!$*" /4456 > /0--56

+:

@ 6 A ( +

$* 1*$$ + >*$

" !'= -=' 4'4) ' =444056

> ==0 '!3 3-0) 40' '33056

B 7CD CD@ @

</-'.+

476.0R,33.15.3 −

⎟⎟⎠

⎞⎜⎜⎝

⎛= se

b

ts p

dof

E )sideshellfor(R14.01

59.652.0

se

b+

=

)sideshellFor(

P

PP.R04.1N

25.036.04.0

⎟⎟⎠

⎞⎜⎜⎝

⎛=

−

rw

rsreu

/'4.

E

9, : /0-3 @/4 /- /==

/='= < /= </' /0!

1/F3-@ 6/-

$ , 2 ,

>0!$*0!56 " =$* =056&, '=*$ ,, =044*8 -6

&$ w /$*

% 0$* & -=( -3( -!3(& =!4# 8 E0*! ,00+ &$./!0'$1*$$

>

E : + & @$ 2

./& $+# ./B

, ,R

14,

R

3

ee

fj == +/3 E

/E

/:; $ G .H, .

I #, $ J

SECTION - I

Q1) The stress function θCoslog3 ⎟⎠⎞⎜

⎝⎛ +++= rDrCr

r

BAr represents the stress

distribution in semi circular ring with inner radius ri = 75 mm and outerradius r0 = 100 mm with ‘d’ as thickness. The constants A, B, C and Dinvolved in the stress function Φ are to be evaluated for following boundaryconditions. [16]

a) The inner and outer surface of the ring is free from the radial stresses aswell as shear stresses.

b) At horizontal cross section total tangential force i.e. 0atP0

==∫ θσθdrdr

ri

where ri and r0 are inner and outer radius of the ring and P is verticalload supported by the ring. Also investigate the stress distribution alongthe cross section of the ring. If the ring is used to support load P = 25 kNdetermine the maximum shear stress developed in the ring and its location.


[3765]-493M.E. (Mechanical Engg.) (Design Engg.)

ADVANCED STRESS ANALYSIS(502202) (2008 Course)


Instructions to the candidates :1) Answer any THREE questions from Section - I and THREE questions from

Section - II.2) Answers to the two sections should be written in separate answer books.3) Neat diagrams must be drawn wherever necessary.4) Figures to the right indicate full marks.5) Use of logarithmic tables, slide rule and non-programmable electronic

pocket calculator is allowed.6) Assume suitable data, if necessary.

P1723

P.T.O.

[3765]-493 - 2 -

Q2) Show that ⎥⎦

⎤⎢⎣

⎡−+= 1

2

2

2

2

b

y

a

xm solves the torsional problem for the solid

elliptical shaft. Determine ‘m’ in terms of Gθ, where G is modulus oftorsional rigidity of shaft and θ is angle of twist. Find the maximum shearingstress and the wrapping function. [16]

Q3) A thin solid circular disc of uniform thickness ‘t’ has an outside diameter of300 mm. Calculate the rotational speed for initial plastic yielding, if yieldstress is 300 MPa and material density is 7800 kg/m3. Take Poisson’s ratioas 0.3. Use maximum shear stress theory of failure. [16]

Q4) Derive an expression for contact stresses when two unequal cylinders incontact under load radial load ‘P’. Using this formulation derive the formulafor wear strength of straight spur gear pair having unequal modulus ofelasticity. What is effect of the hardness on the wear strength? [16]

Q5) Write short notes on any three : [18]

a) Mohr’s circle for three dimensional stresses.

b) Theorem of virtual work.

c) Membrane analogy.

d) Two dimensional problems in Polar coordinates.

SECTION - II

Q6) a) Explain the terms isoclinics and isochromatics in photoelasticity. Whatis there physical significance in measurement of stresses? [8]

b) A 120 Ohm metallic strain gage having gage factor of 2.0 is mountedon steel member having yield strength 200 MPa and modulus ofelasticity 2.1 × 105 MPa. What maximum change of resistance of straingage do you expect? How the Poisson’s ratio and transverse sensitivityaffect this change? [8]

Q7) Explain the importance of bending axis and shear centre for thin walledsection elements. Derive an expression for shear centre for channel sectionas shown in Fig. Q. 7. [16]

Q8) a) Explain the fracture mechanics approach for estimation of residual lifeof a component. What is critical stress intensity factor? How it is usefulin design of cracked components? [6]

b) An edged cracked plate loaded in tension made of material has fracturetoughness of 50 MPa m½ and tensile strength of 550 MPa. Width ofplate is 60 mm and crack length 5 mm. Find the ultimate tensile strengththat would cause unstable propagation of the crack. For this geometryof the specimen the stress intensity factor is

agfK πσ)(1 =

where ( ) ( ) ( ) ( )432 39.3072.2155.10231.012.1)( ba

ba

ba

bagf +−+−= .

a = crack length and b = plate width. [10]

Q9) a) Derive an equation for stress distribution in shrink fitted compoundcylinders with usual notations. [8]

[3765]-493 - 3 -

b) A cylinder of 150 mm internal diameter is subjected to an internalpressure of 50 MPa. The material for the cylinder has permissible stressof 120 MPa in simple tension with modulus of elasticity 200 GPa andPoisson’s ratio is 0.3. Neglecting the longitudinal stress, calculaterequired thickness of the cylinder on the basis of

i) Maximum Principal Stress.

ii) Maximum Principal Strain.[8]

Q10)Write short notes on any three : [18]

a) Bending of long uniformly loaded rectangular plate.

b) Strain gage rosette.

c) Plastic action in thick walled cylinders.

d) Brittle coating method.

e) Disk with uniform strength.

[3765]-493 - 4 -


[3765] - 498M.E. (Mechanical) (Design Engineering)

PROCESS EQUIPMENT DESIGN (2008 Revised Course) (Elective - II) (Theory)


1) Answer any three questions from each section.2) Answers to the two sections should be written in separate books.3) Neat diagrams must be drawn wherever necessary.4) Figures to the right indicate full marks.5) Your answer will be valued as a whole.6) Use of logarithmic tables slide rules, Mollier charts, electronic steam table

and electronic pocket calculator and steam table is allowed.7) Assume suitable data, if necessary giving reasons.

SECTION - I

Q1) a) Explain significance of following preliminaries in process equipment

design. (any four) [8]

i) Design stress. ii) Weld joint efficiency.

iii) Corrosin allowance. iv) Dilation of pressure vessel.

v) Factor of safety.

b) A storage tank 6m in diameter and 7.5m in height has to be provided

with self supported conical roof. The slope of self supported conical

roof is 1 in 5. Roof is subjected to a superimposed load of 125 kg/m2.

Density of plate material is 8000 kg/m3. E = 2 × 106 kg/cm2.

Calculate minimum thickness required for fabrication of self supported

conical roof. [6]

c) What are Hortonspheres? [2]

Q2) a) What is intragranular corrosion and stress corrosion? Explain the ways

to avoid or reduce these types of corrosion. [4]

b) Explain the method for calculating thickness of torispherical head

subjected to i. internal and external pressure. [8]

c) List the theories of failure and explain any one of them. [4]

Q3) a) Explain skirt supports and design aspect related to them. [8]

b) What are entrainment separators? Explain their applications. [4]

c) What is gasket factor? Explain gasket selection and classification. [4]

Q4) a) A pressure vessel is to be designed for an internal pressure of 0.6N/mm2.

The vessel has nominal diameter of 1.2m. The material used for vessel

has permissible stress of 120N/mm2. If the weight of vessel and its

content is 3000kg and torque due to offset piping is 450 N.m. Find

stresses due to combined loading. [10]

b) Explain reinforcement of nozzles. [6]

Q5) Write short notes on any three : [18]a) Expansion joint used in process piping systems.

b) Floating roof type storage tank.

c) Design of saddle support.

d) Protective coatings and their applications.

SECTION - II

Q6) a) Explain design considerations for shell and tube heat exchanger. [8]b) Differentiate between vacuum filters and centrifugal filters. Explain

either rotary disc filter or leaf filter. [8]

Q7) a) What are the types of baffles used in heat exchanger? [4]b) Explain effect of wind load and seismic load on tall vessels. [6]

c) What is an entrainment separator? [2]

d) What types of loses are possible in storage of volatile liquids. [4]

Q8) a) Explain important features of packed or plate columns. [8]b) With neat sketches explain construction, working and main design

considerations of rotary drier. Give it’s applications. [8]

Q9) a) Explain determination of power requirements of agitator. [4]b) Give classification of vacuum pumps or explain any one metering

pump. [4]

c) What are integral, fabricated and formed nozzles? [6]

d) Suggest a suitable material with justification for Handling of any two

of following : [2]

i) Acetic acid.

ii) Chlorine.

iii) Milk and milk products.

Q10)Write short note on any three of following : [18]a) Types of agitators.

b) Vacuum Crystallizer.

c) Inspection of pressure vessels.

d) Process flow diagrams.

!"#$

! " # $% &% '( %) * +( ("$$ , - "$(%$ .$&$$ $$/ %$."

! σ"#$%&' "$#() $

! σ"#(%&* "+,) $

- $ $.%& / 0

! /

1

/ 02

3

4 #5656' 756##564 8 8 4 ,9".,5:

",5:4 ##5:- #

' '

3 2 '; '0& 9$9# "+1&* "..1& 1"#<.1&σ

' "$#.%& σ

' "$%&

σ' "<%& σ

' "$%&

12 ".%&

: . 9$/ 0

/ = > - 35?>3

2 3 8 $.564 8

$56: ' #@ ' A

% / 4 %- /' ' B1'5: 5: 5:

C$ ,# (,C$

& +.C$ #< (,C$

4 ,,C$ 7 ,#C$

% $.C$ ##. $.C$

/DEF E

- ; " <!; " <.% " (%&G; " $$.%& " ##;:;:! " .

& DF

B9" ∫− tdtth

0)(

/ 0

4$ 4 # % ,4 #@ ' 2 G; 3 4; *θ "φ

φ " 53

175

3

15

2vvv +−

3 3=v

θ φ

/ =

2

-

%

!!

! " # $% &% '( %) * +( ("$$ , - "$&$$ $$. %$"

!""

# "

$"$"% "&' & "

()*

" )+,-

. ")+//#0

')+//)(/ & )1//.0 "23"(///.03

"%

⎟⎟⎠

⎞⎜⎜⎝

⎛⎟⎠⎞⎜

⎝⎛+⎟

⎠⎞⎜

⎝⎛−⎟

⎠⎞⎜

⎝⎛+⎟

⎠⎞⎜

⎝⎛−Π=

432

1 39.3072.2155.1023.012.1b

a

b

a

b

a

b

aaK σ

456.

"

"

0

3"

.

" "

7" 6 "

6

'" 8)+ )1/ & 3 " " 9. 3

" y :

7 y 9.0 :( )mMPa

'1;1/ <=/ +//

>1;;* +;// ?/

;*/. +**/ **

" 3 "7)( "

)+(.0

)+

!"6

'( &

" +//.0 (//.03 (

)( @)(////"

% ()(($()(/

)+/// " %

()((3"

)=/.0 m

!0% ( )mKCdN

da Δ= .

!

"6

A

7

!

76@

. ,6

Total No. of Questions :10] [Total No. of Pages :3

[3765]-506 M.E. (Mechanical Engineering) (Design Engineering)

VEHICLE DYNAMICS(502212) (2008 Course ) (Elective - IV)


Instructions to the candidates:1) Answers to the two sections should be written in separate answer books.2) Neat diagrams must be drawn wherever necessary.3) Square bracketed figures to the right indicate full marks.4) Use of logarithmic tables, slide rule and non-programmable electronic pocket

calculator is allowed.5) Assume suitable data, if necessary.

P1731

SECTION - I

Q1) a) What are frequency weightings? Explain most commonly used frequencyweightings for whole-body vibration? [8]

b) The sprung parts of a passenger car weigh 5 kN and the unsprung partsweigh 500 N. The combined stiffness of the suspension springs is 33 kN/mand that of the tires is 350 kN/m. Determine the frequency ratio. [8]

OR

Q2) What is coupling coefficient for bounce and pitch motion? A vehicle is treatedas two degree freedom system in bounce and pitch mode. The mass of thevehicle is 1150 kg and its radius of gyration is 1.3 m. The stiffness of the frontsuspension is 38 kN/m and that of rear suspension is 41 kN/m. Center ofgravity of the vehicle is 1.3 m from front and 1.5 m from rear wheel. Find thenatural frequencies and mode shapes. Also find the location of CG of thevehicle which will uncouple bounce and pitch motion. [16]

Q3) a) Derive an expression for the steer angle fδ in terms of understeer coefficientrequired to negotiate a given turn with usual notations. [8]

b) A passenger car has weight of 25 kN. The weight distribution on thefront axle is 55% and that on rear axle is 45% under static condition. Ifcornering stiffness each of the front tires is 38.93 kN/rad and that of rear

P.T.O.

[3765]-506 2

tires is 38 kN/rad determine the steady state handling behavior of thevehicle. If the vehicle is to be designed for characteristic speed of 120km/hr find the value of wheel base. [8]

OR

Q4) What are the tests carried out for determining handling characteristics ofvehicle? Explain each test in detail. [16]

Q5) Write short notes : [18]a) Human response to vibrations.b) Roll center.c) Effect of tractive forces on cornering.

SECTION - II

Q6) Following data is obtained after constant speed test of a vehicle at 100 km/hrto determine handling characteristics.Steering Angle (deg) Lateral Acceleration (g) 8 0.1

16 0.2 19 0.3 23 0.4 32 0.5 40 0.6 44 0.7 55 0.8

Assuming the linear response estimate vehicle response if wheel base of thevehicle is 3.2 m. Comment on the result. [16]

OR

Q7) Explain braking characteristic of two – axle vehicle. [16]

Q8) A vehicle has a weight of 21 kN and a wheelbase of 2.65 m. The ratio ofthe distance between the center of gravity of the vehicle and the front axleto the wheelbase is 0.475. The cornering stiffness of each of the fronttires is 38.93 kN/rad and that of the rear tires is 38 kN/rad. The averagesteering gear ratio is 25. Determine the yaw velocity gain and the lateralacceleration gain of the vehicle with respect to the steering wheel angle forspeed upto 100 km/hr. [16]

OR

Q9) Consider a vehicle as a mass of 650 kg supported on a spring has a naturalfrequency of 1.3 Hz. The damping ratio is 0.28. The vehicle moves overa speed breaker at 15 km/hr. Speed breaker has length 600 mm and has ashape of half sine curve of amplitude 150 mm. Find the response of thevehicle when it is on the speed breaker and after just crossing speed breaker.

[16]

Q10)Write short notes : [18]a) Moment of turning resistance.b) Steering of vehicles with more than two axles.c) Rolling resistance.

# # # #

[3765]-506 3

! " # $% & % '( %) * +( ("$$ , %$-" . / "&&(%$$$$ $$

!!" ! #$% & '!()* +,!-.,/!-. 0 123+/4

!! ,! /!()* 1 %5,!!6.

!7 * 84 * !+ ( 9! * 4 '() /!-.4

:;/( 9!< 7!-.% < +!!!( 059!6.

6 %3 6

= 57+!-. /!" !<& #.#) :!> !9:>1 ,1 ? 5!9) 5!9%3@ 5!!9/%* 5,,/1 #.$ % /!!!!

4 ( A B 4 (( & ,!!()*

',!-. / !-. '!!-. 4 ( 7*( /!-. !!-.

4 C 3

3

3 (*

+! /! (* ,/!D 3 7* /!!)E9 +;!)E* +!> 4 ? - ) 1 .

F

4 4 &

&5,!()G &5:!!* 3 ! //05!! (EH 5,,0- 5 /)E

/7! * '! 9 ,! /* ,/4 3 9!-. !!-.%I5! /'J!: ,E


[3765] - 514M.E. (Mechatronics)

THEORY OF MACHINES & MECHANISMS (2008 Course)


1) Answer three questions from each section.2) Answers to the two sections should be written in separate books.3) Neat diagrams must be drawn wherever necessary.4) Figures to the right indicate full marks.5) Use of logarithmic tables slide rule, Mollier charts, electronic pocket


SECTION - I

Q1) a) With the help of neat sketches explain the terms Kinematic Link,

Mechanism Kinematic pair, Structure and Degrees of freedom of a

mechanism. [5]

b) Explain with the help of neat sketches inversions of four-bar chain?

Give their practical applications. [5]

c) Explain the mathematical conditions for getting an exact straight line

mechanism? With the help of a neat sketch explain the working of any

one approximate straight line mechanism. [6]

Q2) a) Write short notes on fixed and moving centrodes. [6]

OR

In a slider crank mechanism, the crank 200 mm long and connecting

rod 800 mm long. Find analytically the velocity and acceleration of

piston and angular velocity and angular acceleration of connecting rod

when the crank is turned through 30° from the inner dead centre. The

angular velocity of the crank is 20 rad/s.

b) In the mechanism shown in the figure no. 1, the Driving crank O1A

rotates in anticlock wise direction at a constant angular velocity of 100

rad./sec. The rod AB drives the slider block B which moves in the

horizontal guides. Block D is pinned to the slider B about P. The Block

D has a hole in which the rod O2C can slide. The pivot O2 is 80 mm

above the line of stroke of slider B. The rod O2C is vertical when the

driving crank O1A is horizontal. Determine for the position shown,[10]

i) the velocity of B.

ii) the angular velocity rod O2C.

Q3) a) Write short note on Bobillier construction. [6]

b) The Figure no.2 shows the configuration of a withworth quick return

mechanism. Lengths of the fixed link OA and the crank OP are

200 and 350 mm respectively. Other lengths are AR = 200 mm

and RS = 400 mm. Find the velocity and acceleration of the Ram

using polygon method when the crank makes an angle of 120°

with the fixed link and rotates at 10 rad/sec. [12]

OR

Using Chase Solution, find for the mechanism shown in the figure

no.3 the velocity and acceleration of sliding and the angular velocity

and angular acceleration of link QB for the given position. Given that

OA = 200 and angular velocity of crank OA = 12.566 rad/sec.

SECTION - II

Q4) a) Explain the following terms related to kinematic synthesis : [6]

i) Function Generation.

ii) Path Generation.

iii) Body Guidance.

b) Design a four bar mechanism by using three precision points to generate

y = x1.6 for the range 1≤ x ≤ 5. Assume θs = 315°, Δθ = 90°, Φ

s = 20°,

ΔΦ = 70°. Take length of fixed link AD as 1 unit. [12]

Q5) a) Define the following terms : [6]

i) Longitudinal vibrations,

ii) Transverse vibrations,

iii) Torsional vibrations.

b) Calculate the natural frequency of vibration of a torsional pendulum as

shown in fig with the following dimensions. [10]

Length of the rod L = 1 m

Diameter of the rod d = 5 mm

Diameter of the rotor D = 0.2 m

Mass of the rotor M = 6 kg

The modulus of rigidity for the material of the rod may be assumed to

be 0.80 × 1011 N/m2.

OR

The disc of a torsional pendulum has a moment of inertia of 700 kg-cm2

and is immersed in a viscous fluid. The brass shaft attached to it is of

12 cm diameter and 50 mm long. When the pendulum is vibrating,

the observed amplitudes on the same side of the rest position for

successive cycles are 9°, 6° and 4°. Determine

i) Logarithmic Decrement.

ii) Damping torque at unit velocity and

iii) The periodic time of vibration.

Assume for the brass shaft G = 4.4 × 1010 N/m2. What would the

frequency be if the disc is removed from the viscous fluid?

Q6) a) Write short notes on Jump phenomenon in cam system. [4]

b) The following data relate to a cam operating an oscillating roller follower :

Minimum radius of cam = 30 mm.

Radius of roller = 12 mm.

Length of follower arm = 45 mm

Distance of fulcrum centre from cam center = 55 mm

Angle of ascent = 80°

Angle of descent = 100°

Angle of dwell between ascent and descent = 50°

Angle of oscillation of follower = 30°

Draw the profile of cam if the follower moves outward with S.H.M.

and returns with uniform acceleration and retardation. [12]

OR

Derive expressions for displacement, velocity and acceleration for a

tangent cam operating on a radial translating roller follower :

i) When the contact is on the straight flank and

ii) When the contact is on the circular nose.


[3765] - 526


! "

#$%% &" '$(%$)" *( ($##&" + # (%##$#,- ##,# &##

$%### $" %#$,"

P1736

!

!!

" # " $

%&'%&()*+ %),*-)*

."/"0"

.+ /)'%(/&' $&,0 - " .

! $1

+ $&' /),*%/&2

3

4!

5 ! '

&6

&'

&'

72

&'

.!8

⎥⎦

⎤⎢⎣

⎡⎥⎦

⎤⎢⎣

⎡−−

=⎥⎥

⎦

⎤

⎢⎢

⎣

⎡

2

1

2

1

31

10

x

x

x

x

39!

3 9!8 : . .! ;

:8

''

9!! !8

3< !+= 9! 3 >! -?!

. $8 )

)

43

7

7

21

$ # @$ - $ ! $

3 !!;>9 @; @

)

)7

;;% @

A 8 ? :0+9 @


[3765] - 538

M.E. (Electrical) (Control System)

INTELLIGENT CONTROL

(2008 Course)






P1739

! "##$ %& '$

()

*+, - %& *

.*/---&&

0)*-'&-1&-1) --,

--, 0'%&& -

()

2 . $ .0/-

'-$*0* -

0-3()3-3

-

--$ *0-'/$ -

-**

()

4/+'$ 4/ ') *--$-$ %& )5-)6

"##$- ' ##$ 2&$1&$10&$1

-

()

' "##$* 7

* & #' 8"1'13191 1 $ ##$ :41

⎩⎨⎧

⎭⎬⎫=

T0.8

I0.9

Y0.1

X0.1

E0.3

F0.4

A

⎩⎨⎧

⎭⎬⎫=

T0.5

I0.5

Y0.2

X0.1

E0.8

F0.99

B

"- BA

BA

BA −

';%&

%& - ##$ ' - 0 0 ##

()

8 -"##$-4- -&3<=>1?@ $-

xBA x

x

xx −=

+= 2)(;

1)( μμ

0 - -

14

4

4

& 8 48 '",' )$"##$

'-"##$- %A"##$

()' *-

--



POWER SECTOR ECONOMICS MANAGEMENT &RESTRUCTURING

(2008 Course)Time : 3 Hours] [Max. Marks : 100Instructions to the candidates:

1) Answer any two questions from each section.2) Answers to the two sections should be written in separate books.3) Neat diagrams must be drawn wherever necessary.4) Figures to the right indicate full marks.5) Use of logarithmic tables slide rule, Mollier charts, electronic pocket


SECTION - I

Q1) a) State various indices for assessment of quality of supply, service,

performance and environment. [9]

b) Explain various methods employed for transmission cost allocation.[8]

c) What is market power? How it is exercised? State mechanism to

overcome it. [8]

Q2) a) Discuss various models considered for energy trading. [8]

b) Explain electricity reforms and main features of a system in UK &

Nordic pool. [8]

c) What is congestion? How it can be overcome? Does congestion affects

pricing? Explain it in detail. [9]

Q3) a) Explain following terms : [8]

i) Market clearing price.

ii) Marginal Pricing.

iii) Spot pricing.

iv) Real time pricing.

b) What is ancillary service? Explain market mechanism of buying or

selling ancillary services. [8]

c) What is arbitrage? State its usefulness. Discuss arbitrage in power

market. [9]

SECTION - II

Q4) a) Explain role of central electricity authority and state features of national

electricity policy. [8]

b) How performance based regulation and price cap regulation is empolyed

for tariff setting. [8]

c) Discuss following tariff structures : [9]

i) Time of day tariff.

ii) Telescopic tariff.

iii) Interruptible tariff.

Q5) a) Determine the simple payback period of the investment for two

transformers for following load. [9]

Option A Option B

Capacity 315 kVA 315 kVA

Efficiency at rated capacity 98% 99%

Capital cost Rs. 2.2 lakhs Rs. 3.0 lakhs

Operating PF 0.9 lag 0.9 lag

No load loss Same for both units

Energy changes Rs. 4.5/kwh. for analysis consider following cases

i) 10 hours/day & 250 days/year of operation.

ii) 16 hours/day & 300 days/year of operation.

b) Explain various tariff setting principles. [8]

c) Give salient features of electricity act 2003. [8]

Q6) a) What is regulation & deregulation? Explain the motivation for

deregulation. [9]

b) Explain typical cost components and cost structure of the power sector.

[8]

c) Discuss effect of renewable energy sources and captive power plants

on tariff structure. [8]


[3765] - 547

M.E. (Electrical) (Power System)

POWER SYSTEM DYNAMICS








SECTION - I

Q1) a) An ideal generator is supplying load through a transmission line.

Explain with the help of suitable phasor diagram, effect of increse in

load at constant power factor upon its terminal voltage for [13]

i) Lagging power factor.

ii) Unity power factor.

iii) Leading power factor.

b) A 50 Hz, synchronous generator having inertia constant H = 5.2 MJ/

MVA and x'd = 0.3 pu is connected to an infinite bus through a double

circuit line. The reactance of the connecting HT transformer is 0.2 pu

and reactance of each line is 0.4 pu. | Eg | = 1.2 pu and | V | = 1.0 pu

and Pe = 0.8 pu. Determine critical clearing angle critical cleaning time

and post fault steady state operating angle for the following : [12]

i) A three phase fault occurs at the HT terminals of the transformer

and is cleared with both lines intact.

ii) A three phase fault occurs at the middle of one of the transmission

line and is cleared without line outage.

Q2) Derive the stator and rotor equation of synchronous generator represented

by model 1.1 (i.e. simplified model). [25]

Q3) a) Explain voltage instability and voltage collapse with factors affecting

it. Also explain how to achieve control of voltage instability. [13]

b) Discuss islanding methods and utility in preventing power system

blackouts. [12]

SECTION - II

Q4) a) Explain in brief using block diagram system states of operation and

system security. [10]

b) A generator is supplying power to a load centre through a transmission

line as shown in figure. The power output of the generator is incresed

slowly while maintaining the magnetudes of the voltages V1 and V

2

constant at 1.0 pu by mannual control (of both generator excitation

and infinite bus voltage). Find Eg, E

b and steady state stability limit of

power that can be transmitted [15]

Assume x1 = 0.3, x = 0.5, x

2 = 0.1.

Q5) a) Using Swing equation comment on stability of : [10]

i) Two coherent machines &

ii) Two non coherent machines.

b) Derive an expression for the purpose of small signal analysis of stator

of single machine represented by model 1.0 connected to infinite bus

through line resistance Re and reactance x

e. [15]

Q6) a) Draw the block diagram using transfer function of a regulated

synchronous machine and write its third order characteristic equation.

What are the conditions of stability using Routh’s Criterion. [10]

b) Explain power system stabilizer (PSS) with the help of suitable block

diagram. [15]


[3765] - 554

M.E. (E&TC) Microwave

ELECTROMAGNETICS & ANTENNA THEORY






4) Assume suitable data if necessary.

SECTION - I

Q1) a) Using method of moments, derive expression for field distribution

using integral form of potential equation. [15]

b) Write note on ‘Yee’s FD Algorithm. [10]

Q2) a) Write coefficient matrix A to determine the potential distribution in the

geometry shown in the figure using finite difference method. [15]

b) Compare the strengths and weaknesses of method of moments and

FDTD. [10]

Q3) a) Derive the expression for Green’s function G corresponding to PDE,

for free space. [10]

b) Define following terms related to antenna : [15]

i) Antenna efficiency.

ii) Beam width.

iii) Directivity.

iv) Radiation resistance.

v) Gain.

SECTION - II

Q4) a) The radiation intensity of an antenna is given by U(θ, φ) = cos4 θ sin2

φ For 0 ≤ θ ≤ π/2 and 0 ≤ φ ≤ 2π (in upper half space). It is zero in the

lower half space [15]

Find - i) Exact directivity

ii) Elevation plane half power beam width (in degrees).

b) Explain construction and working of helical antenna. Derive expression

for axial ratio and circumference. [10]

Q5) a) Derive expression for effective length, resonant frequency, effective

width, conductance and input impedance of microstrip antenna. [15]

b) A microstrip antenna with overall dimensions of L = 0.906 cm,

W = 1.186 cm, substrate with height h = 0.1588 cm and dielectric

constant ∈r = 2.2, is operating at 10 GHz. Find : [10]

i) The input impedance.

ii) The position of the feed point where input impedance is 50Ω.

Q6) a) Derive expressions for radiation resistance and directivity of loop

antenna. [10]

b) Find the radiation efficiency of a single turn and 4 turn circular loop

each of radius λ/10π and operating at 10 MHz. The radius of wire is

10–3λ and the turns are spaced 3 × 10–3λ apart. Assume the wire is

copper with a conductivity of 5.7 × 107 s/m and the antenna is radiating

into free space. [15]

! " # $% &% '( %) * +( ("$$

!"

!"

!"

!"

! " " #"

#$ #"

$!%$! !"

!"

$%&'"''' (

&' !"

! % !"

( )!" )** + , *

$ !"

&' % !"

' !"

!"


[3765] - 556


!"#$

P1746

! " " " #$ " %#$"&'())*& +(,Δ "&-++./0#$&+(

"

12(34, 5 6 7-+8%49+4 (34!" :8%;<= 45 !"

5:+% 2"""++;%>

" #

%

<5*) 2 6 " #

" & +

&:5+

2,= 4 4 4!"6 46"+

" 2?<#<491/0

"#=#&0.6 ∠−358#

&+,+-∠08 #21= 6.5 ∠ 1158

#&+'∠−358,"@+AB1

C#$&

"2"5%>,;

@1/0% ((34"4#C

&:+C)%&-+2=#

&+@D∠−408, #12&+-:∠−328

#&+'∠1008 #

&-∠1658#!,%

!

!"##$ $ $%##&'' () *+ ',&&,

!" #$ %"&#'( )* + ,"-) # . )"" ""'/ 0* *)""

!"

# $%

!

# !&%

#! '$!

# (

! !

)! !

*+,

12

! ) ! * '- - - - - -- . . . - -- . . . - -- - . . . - - . -- - . . . - . . .- - - - - - - . -

) *

+ !!

" !&

! " / 0

!

# ! ! 1

# ( 2 !

3455

6 !

! " # $% & % '( %) * +( ("$$ , - "$(%$ . $$ .$ .$&$$

%$ $$/ %$."

!"

# # " # "#

#

$

# ! ##

#

%# #"&

# # #

"

'

# %"## &

%# &

# #"#

# #"##

%#& %##& # ( # #####

%##&

) #

# #"# ##*

%+

,#"-./

0 # ##

# .###

1


[3765] - 572

!"


!" # $ %

P1751

!

" !

#$ %$& " %$&

' " (!

)! ! % &$!

* !" (! %$

& '

+&$' &, $!$ "!- ). '. # )". #

)& ) $$!$ &!

)$ Explain different types of Project Management Skills. [8]

)$.,/ )+ '$$+&$&'

!+*)) %$&0! %$&#1$2! / $0! %

! "

# $% &%

'( %)

* +( ("$$

, %$-"

( )2

cosπn

nx =

!!!

!"#$#%

&'

( ) "# * ))+ +' ))+ , )) +")-

+#.π / )"%)- +

#0ππ

1'2'3,,&456

/,7 1$ /,

!(28

()))/,

/

(-)

) ()9

*7)7&'9

)7&'2)+'

+$'-1

&'+9$

:/0.#;<==/,7+$&' 1):/0.#;<==

&'+)/,2

&'+* 2)$): ) 2

/, + 9 /:/0.#%==>:/0.#;<==/,

!" # $%&!# ' ()*%#%+! ,--.(/

! " # $% &% '( %) * +( ("$$ , %$-"

! "#$% &

'' &

()* # ()* # +()* &

./

)*()* , - . &

'/01 201&+0 &

$$#

( % &

3#$# && & $#

4 $ &

3,% # # - #

)%


[3765] - 606

!


!

" # $%

P1755

!" ###

# # $ # " ###

%& '()*+ #+,

+-

.

-! #/

0

$ #

%& # * # ,

%&##### #/ 12345#

*/ 1,%&6##/ 1

&'(

#+ 789&09&:;/ +1!234#+/ 10234#< =

%&$8μ8"1 ,

%&/ #()"++ / 1 # ##" > ##,

%&?+/ 1

* ," ##1, Consider output of the wavelet decomposition as a 4x4 matrix with 4 rows

specified as [26, 6, 13, 10], [-7, 7, 6, 4], [4, -4, 4, -3] and [2, -2, -2, 0]. Find theEZW code. [10]

%&#,",

%&2@")

%&#

%&;@(@ ##

! "

# $% &%

'( %)

* +( ("$$

, - "'&(%$$&$$ $$

. %$/"

( ) ( ) 0,sin1,V ≠−= rrrr

!" ( )( )312

1

+=

zzf

#$ #%

&&

' ∫C

2z ()$*$*+*$+*+*

$*+

' dzzz

z∫ ++

−

C2 52

3),

--+-+.-%-+-%

"+*$*.+#/" $*+*∞)/" "

0 ( 2

2

x

u

t

u

∂∂=

∂∂

1*$π

$22+$*+*$") *

3& 361,3

1 == kh

' " ( 2

2

2

2

16x

u

t

u

∂∂=

∂∂

3&+

"+%$**$*$$*$.

"& & " * *))!/!&

0 " *.$$$*

+. 21 4 &/4#

&"&- -

' ∫

+

π2

0 sin45

d

0 02 =∇ u +*+$*$*5*+%$225*6**5$225

& 04

11

12 =⎟

⎠⎞⎜

⎝⎛ −+′+′′ y

xy

xy

'!"" +.667&"

0) 8

..+8

( ) ( )xJxxJxdx

dp

pp

p1−=

8

( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) dxxxfn

dxxPxfnn

n

n

n 1!.2

1 21

1

1

1

−−= ∫∫−−

0)( )

2

1)1(1 += nn

Pn

0) ( ) ( ) ( )xJx

xJx

xJ 01212

241 +⎟

⎠⎞⎜

⎝⎛ −=

99*6):;& ) <6) 96="" <)9"

9

9)

9&

>"

9 69*<,? 9*! <?) <,*!) 3 9 &)

& " $$+ & )&/ @/ $+%65=A;B+$+++%+6

6+5AA==;A55=6B+B%$+(

9C)") & ) , + % 6 5 C & ++$ +%$ +%6 +6% +%C & +%$ ++; +% +6= +%+

)&C&"&

)& &" +$ " # $ )/) "0" @ + % 6 5 = A ; B +$@ 5 6 % 6 5 5 5 + 6 %

)"/)

D3* ! ⎟⎟

⎠

⎞⎜⎜

⎝

⎛=

41

43

21

21

P )

( ) ( )43,4

1P 0 =

( )221P ( )2

12P ( )2P ( )21P


[3765] - 608M.E. (Production)CAD/CAM/CIM

(2008 Revised Course)Time : 3 Hours] [Max. Marks : 100Instructions to the candidates:

1) Attempt not more than five questions of which at least two questions must befrom each section.

2) Answers to the two sections should be written in separate books.3) Neat diagrams must be drawn wherever necessary.4) Figures to the right indicate full marks.5) All questions carry equal marks.6) You are advised to attempt not more than five questions.7) Your answers will be valued as a whole.8) Use of electronic pocket calculator is allowed.9) Assume suitable data, if necessary.

SECTION - I

Q1) Solve any two of the following : [20]

a) Consider Δ PQR having co-ordinates P(5, 5), Q(8, 5), R(5, 10).

Determine the vertex positions if

i) Δ PQR is rotated by 55° anticlockwise about point P.

ii) Δ PQR is seated by 3 times in X-direction and 4 times in Y-direction

about vertex point P.

b) Explain the parametric transformation of a parabola.

c) A Δ PQR with vertices P(1, 1), Q(7, 1), R(1, 6) is to be reflected about

the line 3x + 2y + 4 = 0. Determine the co-ordinates of vertices for a

reflected triangle.


a) Given B(1, 1), C(2, 3), D(4, 3) and E(3, 1) as the vertices of a bezier

polygon. Determine seven points on the curve.

b) Explain various methods for hidden line removal.

c) Compare various solid modelling approaches in CAD.


a) What is rapid prototyping and what are its benefits? Explain any one

method in detail.

b) Write the various G and M codes usually used in CNC programing on

CNC machining centre.

c) With a neat sketch, explain FMS, FMC and FMM.


a) By using FEA for a bar shown in fig. 1. Determine nodal displacement,

element stresses & reactions forces. With A1 = A2 = 300 cm2, A3 = 450

cm2 and E = 200 × 105 MPa.

b) A tapered bar of length 150 mm is fixed at one end having area 120 mm2

and on the other end a force of 50kN is applied axially. The area at the

other end is 50 mm2. Determine the nodal deflections and stresses in

bar using three elements.

c) Write in detail the steps followed in FEM analysis. Explain the

following with sketch.

i) Node. ii) Member.

iii) Local axis. iv) Global axis.

v) Degree of freedom.

SECTION - II


a) Explain the shop floor control module in CIM.

b) With a neat sketch, explain different layouts used in FMS.

c) What is concurrent engineering? How it differs from sequential

engineering? Explain with block diagram.


a) What is group technology? Explain the benefits of group technology.

b) What is production flow analysis? How it helps in manufacturing cell

formation?

c) Explain in brief different methods of manufacturing cell formation.

Q7) a) Explain with neat diagram : [10]

i) Computer aided material requirement planning.

ii) Computer aided quality control.

b) Discuss the specific considerations, type of fields of applications and

various information and data files needed for executing a specific expert

system. [10]


[3765] - 618

M.E. (Production)

MATERIAL TECHNOLOGY








SECTION - I

Q1) a) What is dislocation? Explain it’s role in plastic deformation. [6]

b) Why solid solution is harder than the parent metal? Explain also, on

what factors hardening of solid solution depends. [6]

c) What is a perfect crystal? How strength of perfect crystal & real crystal

be compared? [4]

Q2) a) Explain ductile-brittle transition in steel. [5]

b) Explain Age hardening in detail with atleast 2 examples. [6]

c) Establish relationship between stress required to propagate a crack in a

brittle material & size of crack.

A relatively large plate of a glass is subjected to a tensile stress of 40

MPa. If the specific surface energy & modulus of elasticity for the

glass are 0.3 J/m2 & 69 GPa respectively. Determine the maximum

length of a surface flow that is possible without fracture. [7]

Q3) Answer the following : [16]a) Explain what is Fracture Toughness.

b) What is Low Cycle Fatigue? Draw typical S-N curves for steel &

Aluminium. Explain the difference between these two curves if any.

c) Explain typical Fatigue fracture & various stages of fatigue process.

Q4) Write short notes on (any 4) : [16]a) Problems of high temperature materials.

b) Strengthening due to Grain boundary.

c) Procedure for failure analysis.

d) Work hardening.

e) Super plasticity & Homologus temperature.

SECTION - II

Q5) a) Which factors would you consider for material selection? [6]b) What are shape memory alloys? Give 2 examples & 2 applications of

shape memory alloys. [5]c) What are Dual phase steels? Why are they used for car bumpers? [5]

Q6) a) Discuss advantages & disadvantages of advanced ceramics if used in

automobile I.C. engine.

b) Explain any ‘one’ method of processing of ceramics with it’s

application.

c) What is Metallic Glass? How it is produced?

d) Explain the various measures which you would take to avoid failure

due to corrosion. [16]

Q7) a) What is Maraging steel? Explain with typical composition, properties,

strengthening mechanism & applications. [6]b) What are the problems of high temperature materials? Give 2 examples

of component which operate at high temperature & suitable material

for those components. [6]

c) What are cemented carbides? How they are produced? [4]

Q8) a) Explain how Boron fibers are produced. With a suitable graph, explain,

how fiber’s orientation influence strength of fiber reinforced composite.

Also explain aspect ratio. [5]

b) Explain with suitable example [9]

i) Cladding.

ii) Bimetallics.

iii) Metal-matrix composite.

c) Boron fibers Ef = 380 GPa are made into a unidirectional composite

with Aluminium matrix Em = 60 GPa. What is the modulus parallel to

the fibers for 10 & 60 vol.%. [4]


[3765] - 625


!" # $ % &&

' &

P1761

!"#

$ %" & '( )" *

+ , ( *( (

+ -. ( / (

( )

" () (

+ ( ((

( (((( (

&!0! 1 " (()(( (

Discuss the method of solving an unconstrained GP problem usingdifferential calculus. [9]

(( +2((*! (

1 (

. (3 1 *!

+ ( 4

! ""#$

! " # $% &% '( %) * +( ("$$ , %$-"

!

!" #$" # %

!% !&' %(

%

)

" *

./

#+#$# + #

!,- .! /01#

%/2$% /2 #+# %/2

1

"

!3

, ., .

-

! 4 -

! "#!

$%%& '

! " # $% &% '( %) * %$+"

!""#$%!& '

""() !*+ ! !

)

$ , -

,-

+).)/ ! + ! !0

+ 00

1+234,

5(&/

67 +

+

. !(

1 8 +

"9:"';<9 !"9:"';<=' > 6 6 !

! -5 ?

1 83 @ 8

A-5 +!) !+

1+234, ..

/0-5

! (

?(

!"

! " ! "# $% &% '( %) *+ ,( (!$$ - %$.! *

! "

##$ ##! %

&'"

' ( ) (

') * (' ) + *

"

##+*#!, (#

( -

&'

!.# '%

/ 0%1

&2

, )"

& .%, ) %$ ) %%

( + "

.,* )

' / $' /

+) '

* '

"

$./

,/# (/

$1

! ' ' &' ' )'

) ''3'4 5#


[3765] - 647


!"

# $

% &"

P1771

! " # $ # " $ % & ' # (

($ )$(

$$$

($ " ' $ %( )

$

( ( $

'(

( (

$ )

(* (

$( * (

( $ * ( +$, -,. /,0 (.,0 1,2 30,2 40,+ 5+,+ 32,+ 5 $

) ( 6 (7. 18

)

'(* ( ( What is the de-facto industry standard for measurement of quality?c) How are the quality control activities planned and properly executed?

Describe the quantitative approach to quality management of software.

9 0 & 0

' * ) *

!"#$%$! &$"#

! " # $% &' &("

! ""

# $

# % &

# & ' (

" !

)

##*& #* + )

' "

)# &

#, & '$ -

# %' -


[3765] - 653

M.E. (Computer Engineering)

ADVANCED SOFTWARE ENGINEERING

(Computer Networking)

(2008 Course) (510310) (Sem. - II)Time : 3 Hours] [Max. Marks : 100







SECTION - I

Q1) a) What is a prototype model? Under what circumstances it is beneficial

to construct a prototype model? Does the construction of a prototype

model always increase the overall cost of software development. [6]

b) Suppose a program for solving a problem costs C and a software for

solving that problem costs 9C. Where do you think this extra 8C cost

is spent? Suggest a possible breakdown of this extra cost. [6]

c) What are the advantages of using formal specification? [4]

Q2) a) Giving reasons for your answer, suggest an appropriate control model

for the following systems [6]

i) A set of software tools which are produced by different vendors

but must work together.

ii) A television controller which responds to signals from a remote

control unit.

b) Justify the statement given below : [4]“A design approach based on information hiding lead to a design which

may be readily modified”.

c) Draw state machine model and thread diagram for the following

system : [6]“The software which controls a compact disc player”.

Q3) a) Explain component based software development and problems

associated with it. [8]b) Explain why inheritance is a potentially error-prone construct? Why

its use should be minimized when developing critical systems in an

object-oriented language? [8]


a) Distributed systems architecture.

b) Design patterns.

c) MVC framework for GUI design.

SECTION - II

Q5) a) Explain why regression testing is necessary and how automated testing

tools can asist with this type of testing. [4]

b) Explain with suitable example the intermediate COCOMO model. [6]

c) Explain any one design metric. Why design metrics are, by themselves,

an inadequate method of predicting design quality? [6]

Q6) a) Explain fundamental characteristics of rapid software development

processes. Discuss problems associated with it. [6]

b) Explain how the principles underlying agile methods lead to the

accelerated development and deployment of software. [6]

c) Write short note on : [6]

Extreme Programming.

Q7) a) What do you mean by process improvement? With the help of neat

labelled diagram explain the process improvement process. [8]

b) Explain the principal technical and non-technical factors which affect

maintenance. [8]

Q8) a) Explain clean room process with suitable diagram. [8]

b) Explain in detail risk management. [8]


[3765] - 657


!

" #

P1776

! "# $ %#&

' "(%#&)* +,-&+*

' - ./0)"#)(12

-34/0/-' -5 4()./0)-#(6)7#(6)#

-534/0-/- #& (2)7,7/ & -2

( ( +"$

$ %

' //4 /"*%8 //4 %#& //4

' 9.0 /"*% 7":*7.+11.(2+10(2

' /6;"<2## - "/ ( =(>,=0>/"* ( //4,//45

' ( # .%' !%< 7(#.%

4 # #>/"*&

'> /"* & //45%' %

Explain a call setup based on SIP signalling? [8]

#& *#?/(81<?(0 #& *?(0

/& *?(0 0."6)<5,.0

' /6;"<2## 7 0" (<5.0 (/(/ /"*.( /"*.0 . !


[3765] - 662M.E. (Chemical)

PROCESS DESIGN AND SYNTHESIS (2008 Course) (Elective - I)


1) Answer any three questions from each section.2) Answers to the two sections should be written in separate books.3) Neat diagrams must be drawn wherever necessary.4) Figures to the right indicate full marks.5) Use of logarithmic tables slide rule, Mollier charts, electronic pocket


SECTION - I

Q1) a) Discuss with neat diagram, the procedure for product design. [10]

b) What is green engineering? Explain with example. [8]

Q2) a) Discuss in detail, the various health and safety consideration involved

in chemical process design. [10]

b) Explain the life cycle of product. [6]

Q3) a) Explain how various commercial process design softwares are used

for new process design. [10]

b) Explain Grassroot design. [6]

Q4) Explain the following terms : [16]

a) Onion Model.

b) Hierarchy for chemical process design.

SECTION - II

Q5) a) Explain with suitable example, types of reaction systems. [8]

b) Discuss the effect of temperature and pressure variation on selection of

ideal reactor. [8]

Q6) a) Discuss the procedure for deciding the attainable region for given

reaction system. [12]

b) Explain Heat Exchange Network. [4]

Q7) a) Explain the construction of residue curve maps. [8]

b) Discuss distillation sequencing using thermal coupling. [8]

Q8) Explain the following terms : [18]

a) Problem Table Algorithm.

b) Reactive Separation.

c) Heat & Power Integration.


[3765] - 669

M.E. (Chemical)

PROCESS MODELING & SIMULATION









SECTION - I

Q1) a) What is a process model? Discuss its applications. [8]

b) What are the fundamental laws used for formulation of a process model?

[8]

Q2) a) What are the various smoothing techniques? Explain spline

interpolation. [8]

b) Develop a mathematical model for a CSTR operated isothermally in

liquid phase with irreversible exothermic reaction.

A + B ⎯→⎯k C

Where k is rate constant. The reaction is first order with respect to

reactant A. Write all the assumptions made. [8]

Q3) a) 3 CSTRs are connected in series. Reaction A + B ⎯→⎯k C+D is taking

place in each reactor. Each reactor is maintained at different temperatures

and rate constant in each reactor is k1, k2 & k3. Volume of each reactor

is V1, V2, V3 respectively. Reactant A is fed at a flow rate of Fo &

concentration CAo in 1st reactor. Derive a mathematical model for the

system with assumptions. [12]

b) Explain a process model for a two stage liquid-liquid extraction process.

[6]

Q4) a) Develop a model for an ideal binary mixture of components A & B to

be separated using distillation column. Write all assumptions. [12]

b) Explain basic types of experimental design. [4]

SECTION - II

Q5) a) Derive a mathematical model for gas-liquid absorption column with

out chemical reaction. [8]

b) Develop a process model for two stage feedback evaporator system.

Give all assumptions. [8]

Q6) a) Explain least square method for linear regression. [4]

b) Fit the given data in a linear model and get the unknown values using

factorial design method. [12]

Y 20.5 60.0 59.0 68.1 79.0

x1

–1 1 –1 1 0

x2

–1 –1 1 1 0

Q7) a) Define optimization and give its applications. [6]

b) Explain the terms : [4]

i) Stationery points.

ii) Convex function.

c) Minimise the function f(x) = x3 – 6x – 2 in the range 0 ≤ x ≤ 10 to

20% of x. [8]

Q8) a) Derive an equation for optimal pipe diameter for a fluid flowing with

velocity ϑ, density ρ, viscosity μ and mass flow rate m. Write

assumptions. [8]

b) Derive the necessary & sufficient conditions for optimization. [8]

! "# $%&' ((

! " # $% &% '( %) * +( ("$$ , - $$%)$ $. / "$(%$ $$0$$ 0$&$$

%$ $$1 %$0"

! !""#$%$

&' (

( (

( $

'$ $#)# * + , #) ++

+ -

. ρ#/01 2

/ #3

0 # #134!5)

##416

##55!5)

7 &4 5))8 59)82' 5 '

#:)8

#))5:);#))64)0 #))<130

ΛpC #)165,0/

=#))5>1,0 /#5.'#$5.>>)/

#65<!5).

? 2

@ @

,

!"#

! " # $% &% '( %) * +( ("$$ , - "$(%$ . $$.$$ .$&$$

%$ $$/ %$."

!

"# $

% "& '' #" (' )# *" ++, +&) '")-$.-/ '0 (0 () )" ), )0 )) &# **123-/4+"1

3 %1)).3 +(,4+"5

67% 663

% 8

67 9

%

: ; 83

3

<=


[3765] - 676


!

" #

$ % &' &

( &

P1784

! " #$% &'( ) *(

+ , "

"

"

!

) *

!" " "

!" Derive the equation for effectiveness factor for isothermal first order chemical

reaction occurring within a rectangular slab of porous catalyst. [10]

"

! -

"! ,! -

!" #$%&'!&' "!#%

#%" ((

! " ! # $ % &' '% ( )' !* +, - %."'! / ! 0% + +

!" #$%#%

&&$'

(&)&$%)

*&$(

+ , -. /

& 0+$12

0+&$

-+ -!/

&)&1*2$3

, 4$&0+&2 0%+$( 5 6*2 78 #

!, %,# , 13 1333 -- # ,233#7$%33#9$1333 #,- :* #

/

+ ,,#

-+ ,,-:#

+ ,, #

;< , #

! " # $ %& &$'' ( )& ' * +, - $.!& ''' ''/ '$ +''+

!"

#

$"%

! " # " "$ % &' ())

! " # $ %& &$'' ( )& ' * +, - $.!& '''/'&.'&/ .'&!! ''0 '$ +''+

!

"

#! $

#! %

&'!$ "! ! ! (! ! )


[3765] - 697

M.E. CSE (IT)

APPLIED ALGORITHMS



1) Question 1 is compulsory.



4) Neat diagrams must be drawn whenever necessary.


SECTION - I

Q1) You’re consulting for a small computation-intensive investment company

and they have the following problem to solve: [18]

They are doing simulation in which they look at n consecutive days of a

given stock, at some point in the past. Let’s number the days i = 1,2,....,n;

for each day i, they have a price p(i) per share for the stock on that day.

(We’ll assume for simplicity that the price was fixed during each day.)

Suppose during this time period, they wanted to buy 1000 shares on some

day and sell all these shares on some later day. They want to know: when

should they have bought and when should they have sold in order to have

made as much money as possible. (If there was no way to make money

during the n days, you should report this instead.)

For example, suppose n = 3, p(1) = 9, p(2) = 1, p(3) = 5. Then you should

return “buy on 2, sell on 3” (buying on day 2 and selling on day 3 means

they would have made Rs. 4 for a share the maximum possible for that

period).

Clearly, there’s a simple algorithm that takes time O(n2) : try all possible

pairs of buy/sell days and see which makes them the most money. Your

investment friends were hoping for something a little better.

Show how to find the correct numbers i and j in time O(nlogn).

Q2) a) Suppose you are given a connected graph G, with edge costs that you

may assume are all distinct. G has n vertices and m edges. A particular

edge e of G is specified. Give an algorithm with running time O (m + n)

to decide whether e is contained in a minimum spanning tree of G.[8]

b) Let G be a directed graph with n vertices. Let length (u, v) be the

length of the edge (u, v). A path starting at a given vertex v0 going

through every other vertex exactly once and finally returning to v0 is

called as a tour. The length of the tour is the sum of the lengths of the

edges on the path defining the tour. We are concerned with finding a

tour of minimum length. A greedy way to construct such a tour is : Let

(P, v) represent the path so far constructed; it starts at v0 and ends at v.

Initially P is empty and v = v0, if all vertices in G are on P, then include

the edge <v, v0> and stop; otherwise include an edge <v,w> of

minimum length among all edges from v to a vertex w not on P. Prove

whether this greedy method necessarily generates a minimum-length

tour. [8]

Q3) a) Define ‘O’ (Big-Oh), Omega and Theta notations used to specify time

complexity. Using an example of [8]

f(n) = 16n9 + 22n4 + 42, specify the g(n) for the above notations along

with suitable constants.

What is the idea of tight bound?

b) Define P, NP, NP-C and NP-H. [8]

Show the relation between these classes of problems and give 2

examples of problems in each of these classes.

Q4) a) Give a Brute Force solution to the TSP. What is the efficiency of the

algorithm. [8]

b) Give an approximation algorithm for solving the Vertex Cover problem

in polynomial time. [8]

SECTION - II

Q5) a) Solve the following linear program using SIMPLEX ALGORITHM

Maximize - 5x1 – 3x

2

Subject to :

x1 – x

2 ≤ 1

2x1 + x2 ≤ 2

x1, x

2 ≥ 0 [10]

b) Write a linear program corresponding to find maximum flow in the

following fig. [8]

Q6) a) Write a algorithm for determining whether any two line segment in a

set of segments intersect and calculate its time complexity. Also prove

the correctness of algorithm. [10]

b) Describe and drew PRAM (Parallel Random Access M/C) Architecture.

[6]

Q7) a) State and prove the Max-flow min-cut theorem. [8]

b) Give a “brute-force” method (which might require time proportional

to N2) for computing the Veronoi diagram. [8]

Q8) a) Prove that for any pair of vertices u & v and any capacity & flow

function c & f where

cf(u, v) + c

f(v, u) = c(u, v) + c(v, u). [8]

b) Write Basic Ford-Fulkerson algorithm and what is the efficiency of

the algorithm. [8]


[3765] - 699

M.E. (Information Technology)

ADVANCED OPERATING SYSTEMS







SECTION - I

Q1) a) What are the factors influencing block size selection in a DSM system?

What are the advantages of using the page size as the block size in a

DSM system? [8]

b) What are the main causes of thrashing in a DSM system? What are the

commonly used methods to solve the thrashing problem in a DSM

system? [8]

Q2) a) Explain in detail the major issues in designing a distributed operating

system. [10]

b) Discuss the reasons why distributed computing systems are gaining

popularity. [8]

Q3) a) What is client server binding? Explain the handling of five different

issues involved in the client server binding process. [8]

b) Describe the three types of communication protocols used in RPCs.[8]

Q4) a) Describe the Chandy-Misra-Haas algorithm for deadlock detection. State

the advantages of this algorithm. [8]

b) Prove that the existence of a cycle in a general resource allocation

graph is a necessary but not a sufficient condition for the existence of a

deadlock. [8]

SECTION - II

Q5) a) Explain the different issues involved in designing a load sharing

algorithm. [8]

b) State the desirable features of a good global scheduling algorithm. [8]

Q6) a) Explain the desirable features of a good message passing system. [8]

b) What are the differences between replication and caching? What are

the advantages of replication of data in a distributed file system? [8]

Q7) a) How does the Gifford Quorum based protocol handle the network

partition problem and increase the availability of write operations at

the expense of read operations? [8]

b) Explain in brief the design goals of Amoeba. [8]


a) UNIX emulation in Mach.

b) Fault tolerance.

c) Process Migration.

d) LRPC.

!"#$" $%%&#$ ' $ ( %'&#)*+ ',- . /00$

! " # $% &% '( %) * +( ("$$ , %$-"

!

" !# $$$

!!%! & '

!! " !!# $

() !(

# !! $ ! #

*++$ !+ !# ,- - -%

' $

! +) !! + !! +

./

'% $ !'% $

$ $ ! . &# $ " !&/

!!+# 01 % 2 $ # !!

! & + + ! "

!! + 3435 !$ + $#35 34+$

! $ 6+ ' !$ 6+ $$ $ +$ 6+' $

+ !! !'% %!

!! + + ) !$

+ ! '

*+$ 6 !%$

!"#$%& &'()&*

! "#$! "#$% & ' ('& & )* '&&+ , -* *"(( . '("

! " !

# $ $ $!# """%$!#$&$!'

( )!

("*")!

+*"","$! #)! )%! -"!) %$!

'$$.(#.(+*.(!

+ " ". /!. 0$$!

')")"* # %*

1) (#.!+*!

+*2"*"!

+*3345!'")$"")""!

1)$6!,$)6)))

.)*!

' " )

788!


[3765]-715 M.E. (IT) (CSE)

HIGH PERFORMANCE COMPUTER NETWORK(514412) (Elective - IV) (2008 Course )


1) Answer any three questions from each section.2) Answers to the two sections should be written in separate books.3) Neat diagrams must be drawn wherever necessary.4) Figures to the right indicate full marks.5) Assume suitable data, if necessary.

P1797

SECTION - I

Q1) a) Explain SRP protocol and authentication.b) Explain the use of multiple servers and multiple queries in HPCN.

[16]Q2) a) Draw and explain the architecture of broad band Network.

b) Elaborate the need and use of Gigabit ethernet with the help of architecture.[16]

Q3) a) Explain how ATM can made compatible with IP cloud to convey the data.

b) Compare X.25, frame relay and ATM. [16]

Q4) Solve any three :a) Protocol Architecture of ISDN N/W.b) ATM service categories.c) Compare circuit switching, packet switching and message switching.d) B-ISDN. [18]

SECTION - II

Q5) a) Explain DMT with block diagram.b) How different DMT techniques will differ with one another, explain.

[16]

P.T.O.

[3765]-715 2

Q6) a) Explain DWDM in detail.b) With the help of neat blocks, explain SONET architecture.

[16]Q7) a) Explain the significance of mobile IP.

b) Explain CDMA in detail. [16]

Q8) Solve any three :

a) Fibre channel protocol architecture.

b) UMTS.

c) GSM.

d) Design issues in wired and wireless LAN. [18]

# # # #


[3765]-716 M.E. (Information Technology)

SERVICE ORIENTED ARCHITECTURE ( Rev. 2008) (Elective - IV) (Sem. - II)


Instructions to the candidates:1) Attempt all questions.2) Figures to the right indicate full marks.

P1798

SECTION - I

Q1) a) Model the Airline reservation system with SOA. [10]b) Explain concept of service in SOA. [8]

ORa) Model the banking system with SOA. [10]b) Describe misperceptions about SOA. [8]

Q2) a) What is the IBM’s on demand operating environment. [8]b) Explain SOA characteristics. [8]

ORa) Describe SOA delivery strategies. [8]b) Explain enterprise service BUS. [8]

Q3) a) What is business centric SOA and its advantages. [8]

b) Explain SOA life cycle. [8] OR

a) Describe enterprise solution Assets. [8]

b) What are various non-functional requirements in SOA. [8]

P.T.O.

[3765]-716 2

SECTION - II

Q4) a) Describe application integration and enterprise integration. [10]b) Explain service oriented design process. [8]

OR

a) Describe various tools available to implement SOA. [10]

b) What is the importance about SOA Governance. [8]

Q5) a) Explain SOA standards. [8]b) Describe security arrangements in SOA solution. [8]

ORa) What is service enablement. [8]b) Explain SOA quality assurance. [8]

Q6) a) Explain operational management challenges. [8]b) What do you understand by service level agreements. [8]

ORa) What is the role of ESB in SOA Governance. [8]b) What is an impact of changes to services. [8]

# # # #

! "

# $% &%

'( %)

* +( ("$$

, - $$%)$ $

. / "$(%$ $$0$$ 0$&$$ %$ $$

1 %$0"

!"# $%& '(()$

*

( ) ⎥⎦

⎤⎢⎣

⎡−

+++

+= 2

2121

21222

211

2

2 1xx

nn

nnnn

nnσσσ

+,-. 1x . 2x .σ1.σ2.$

/ xxdxxd −=−= ,,, 2211 21

2211

nn

xnxnx

++=

01$1 2 $

31 "45'6 2 # $! 7

0 0# 0! 3 "8 "! 8 !(9 ": " 8# "8' "& 8% 88 8! "# !: "( #&

&# : #%: 88

' . $%%$

01 $ . .

$ ;% 9 7 "8 :! " #" !! 8: &! !" # :3 7 ! % "" ( !8 8 :: #( #" <%%8$ $

/7

;=

>

/

= -7 ?"%@!

*4 A&

A%8

@!

≥ "8

≥ %.

≥ %

<


[3765] - 719

M.E. (Environmental Engineering)

ENVIRONMENTAL CHEMISTRY







SECTION - I

Q1) Explain the concept, scope and segments of environmental chemistry. Explain

the various terms associated with environmental chemistry. [16]

Q2) Discuss the following in detail : [16]

a) Chemistry of water.

b) Biosynthesis of DNA & RNA.

Q3) Give the classification of pesticides and focus on degradation, analysis and

pollution due to pesticides. [18]


a) Chemistry of Hydrocarbons.

b) Soil chemistry.

SECTION - II

Q5) Draw a neat sketch and explain the construction, principle and working of :

a) GLC.

b) Isotope dilution analysis. [16]

Q6) Define adsorption and explain the design steps for designing a adsorption

column. Discuss the various adsorption isotherms with neat diagrams and

write all necessary equations. [18]

Q7) Define the following terms and explain the method of determination of :[16]

a) Surface Tension.

b) Conductivity.

c) BOD.

d) COD.


a) Green House Effect and Global warming.

b) Ion Exchange Chromatography.

1


[3765]-71M.E. (Mech.) (Design Engg.)

TRIBOLOGY



SECTION - I

Q1) a) Define Tribology – With reference to 'Jost Report" give the importanceof Tribology in industry. [8]

b) What role does the apparent area of contact, real area of contact andcontact area play in field of Tribology? [8]

Q2) a) Classify and enumerate different minor and major types of wear. [8]

b) State the role of various factors affecting the wear. [8]

Q3) a) Considering two identical cylinders under the condition of plain strain,

show that EπRP42

′′

=a in Hertzian contact. Clarify the terms ER ′′and .

With help of sketch show the case of R′as infinity, negative and positivefor above. [12]

b) State and explain classical laws of wear. [4]

Q4) a) Explain the mechanism of rolling friction. [6]

b) Derive the equation for coefficient of rolling resistance in case of cylinderon plane. [10]

P1649

P.T.O.

2

[3765]-71 - 2 -

Q5) Write short notes on (any three): [18]

a) Auto correlation in surface texture measurement.

b) Theory of ploughing.

c) Junction growth.

d) Modified adhesion theory.

e) Lubrication Regimes.

SECTION - II

Q6) a) State the assumptions in deriving the Reynold's equation. [6]

b) Using the basic Reynold's equation derive Reynold's equation for gasbearings. [10]

Q7) a) Explain phenomenon of squeeze film lubrication. [6]

b) State and explain any five practical examples of squeeze filmapplications. [10]

Q8) a) Derive the equation for flow rate through rectangular slot. [8]

b) State advantages and limitations of hydrostatic bearings. Also stateapplications of hydrostatic bearings. [8]

Q9) a) Explain phenomenon of elastohydrodynamic lubrication. [6]

b) Using Modified Reynold's equation for EHL derive Ertel-Grubinequation. [10]

Q10)Write short notes on (any three): [18]

a) Rayleigh step bearing.

b) Basic requirements of gas bearings.

c) Assumptions in infinitely long and short bearings.

d) Energy losses in hydrodynamic journal bearings.

e) Lubrication in metal working.

SECTION - I

Q1) a) Plot the refractive-index profiles as a function of radial distance r ≤ afor graded index fibers that have α values of :

i) α = 1 ii) α = 2

iii) α = 8 iv) α = ∞.

Assume that the fibers have a 25μm core radius, n1 = 1.48 and Δ = 0.01.

What value of α is the best choice for graded index fibers and state thereason for it? [8]

b) Explain Polarization-Mode dispersion in detail. [8]

Q2) a) A GaAs optical source with a refractive index of 3.6 is coupled to asilica fiber that has a refractive index of 1.48. If the fiber end and thesource are in close physical contact, then calculate:

i) Fresnel’s reflection at the interface &

ii) Power loss at the interface.

Suggest methods to reduce this interface loss. [8]

b) Explain the various lensing schemes with neat diagrams. [8]

! "

# $% &%

'( %)

* +( ("$$

, %$-"

./

Q3) a) A single mode fiber has following specifications :

V = 2.40; n1 = 1.47; n2 = 1.465 & core diameter Za = 9 μm.

Calculate the insertion losses of a fiber joint having a lateral offset of1μm. [8]

b) Explain : [8]i) Chromatic dispersion penalty.

ii) PMD Penalty &

iii) Extinction ratio penalty.


a) Modal noise in Laser diodes & Best policies to avoid it.

b) LED drive circuits.

c) Digital modulation techniques.

SECTION - II

Q5) a) An engineer decides to set up an optical link to work at a data rate of 20Mb/s & a BER of 10–9. He chooses the following components : [10]

→ Silicon pin photodiode : –42 dBm(at 850 nm)

→ Ga A/As LED couples : 50 μw averageOptical power into a fiber flylead with a 50 μm core diameter.

→ Flylead loss : 1 dB

→ Connector loss : 1 dB(at detector interface)

Assume suitable system margin and estimate the possible transmissiondistance for a cable with attenuation of 3 dB/km.Graphically represent the link-loss budget.

b) An EDFA is pumped at 980 nm with a 30 mw pump power. If thegain at 1550 nm is 20 dB, calculate the

i) maximum input power &

ii) the maximum output power of the amplifier in dB.[6]

Q6) a) Explain the concept of photonic switching. [8]

b) Explain Angular Division Multiplexing. [8]

Q7) a) Explain the selection criteria for the key components in an opticalcommunication link. [8]

b) Explain Homodyne & Hetrodyne detection concept. [8]


a) Synchronous transfer mode.

b) Optical networks.

c) Multiplexing techniques.

1



ADVANCED COMPUTER NETWORK

(2002 Course) (Theory)Time : 3 Hours] [Max. Marks : 100

Instructions to the candidates:1) Answer 3 questions from Section-I and 3 questions from Section-II.2) Answers to the two sections should be written in separate books.3) Neat diagrams must be drawn wherever necessary.4) Figures to the right indicate full marks.5) Assume suitable data, if necessary.

SECTION - I

Q1) Consider an M/G/1 queue.

a) State what is the average waiting time for such a system.

b) Assume a line speed of 56 kbps and utilization of 50%. The averagemessage length is 1400 bits. The message lengths are exponentiallydistributed. For this system,i) What is the arrival rate?ii) What is the mean service time?iii) What is the average waiting time?

[16]Q2) J. Eiv and A. Lempel described a string matching algorithm which is referred

to as LZ 77.

Describe the working of this algorithm for compression of data using asequence of characters by way of example. [16]

Q3) a) Describe the various facilities and devices used to construct a network.

b) With respect network components, discuss the following characteristics:i) Capacity. ii) Cost.iii) Reliability. iv) Availability.v) Compatibility.

[18]

P1675

P.T.O.

2

[3765]-195 - 2 -

Q4) a) State formally the problem addressed by Constrained MST algorithm.b) Present a suitable implementation of the CMST algorithm.

[16]

SECTION - II

Q5) Write short notes on the following: [16]

a) Erlang_B function.

b) ESAU-William algorithm.

Q6) State the significance of the following issues a network designer mustconsider: [18]

a) Justifying a network.

b) Scope.

c) Manageability.

d) Architecture.

e) Switching mode.

f) Placement and sizing.

g) Line topology

h) Routing.

Q7) Write short notes on the following: [16]

a) RAID.

b) Network Attached Storage.

c) Facsimile compression.

Q8) H.323 is the pioneering umbrella specification recommended by ITU-T forimplementing multimedia conferencing. [16]

a) What are the various H.323 Network Elements and their functions?

b) What is the H.323 protocol stack and protocol inter-workingarchitecture?

c) State and explain the various phases of call modes of H.323.

1


[3765]-234M.E. (Instrumentation & Control) (Process & Bio)

ADVANCED TECHNIQUES IN MODELING ANDOPTIMIZATION


Instructions to the candidates:1) Answer any two questions from each section.2) Answers to the two sections should be written in separate answer books.3) Neat diagrams must be drawn wherever necessary.4) Figures to the right indicate full marks.5) All questions carry equal marks.6) Use of logarithmic tables slide rule, Mollier charts, electronic pocket


SECTION - I

Q1) Obtain the linearized model of the quadruple tank process shown in Fig. 1.Assume suitable parameters/terms if required. [25]

Q2) After simulation or real experimentation of the quadruple tank process shownin Fig.1, the different aspects of multivariable control systems can be studied.Explain your own judgments/facts with respect to following points. [25]a) The influence of the valve settings on the location of the process zeros.b) Recognize when a process is easy or not to control.c) The influence of the locations of the zeros on the system response for

different input directions.d) Design and evaluation of decentralized control.e) Design and evaluation of decoupling controllers.f) The controllability and observability aspects of the system.

P1683

P.T.O.

Fig. 1

WhereAi cross-section of Tank.ai cross-section of the outlet hole.bi water level.

2

[3765]-234 - 2 -

Q3) Explain in details the steps used to solve a minimization problem (withreference to any suitable method of minimization), andFind the minimum value of w = 3x1 + 2x2

Subject to the constraints2x1 + x2 ≥ 6x1 + x2

≥

4Where x1

≥

0 and x2

≥

0. [25]

SECTION - II

Q4) Write short note on: [25]a) Newton-Rapson method.b) Runga-Kutta method.c) Adom Bashforth method.

Q5) A steel company has two Mills. Mill 1 costs $70,000 per day to operate andit can produce 400 tons of high-grade steel, 500 tons of medium-grade steeland 450 tons of low-grade steel each day. Mill 2 costs $60,000 per day tooperate and it can produce 350 tons of high-grade steel, 600 tons of medium-grade steel and 400 tons of low-grade steel each day. The company hasorders totaling 100,000 tons of high-grade steel, 150,000 tons of medium-grade steel and 124,500 tons of low-grade steel. How many days shouldthe company run each mill to minimize its costs and still fill the orders?[25]

Q6) How to carry-out the modeling of the CSTH as shown in Fig. 2. What aredifferent fundamental laws required to model? Explain the different steps/procedure involved in the modeling. [25]

Fig. 2

1


[3765]-242M.E. CSE (Information Technology)

ADVANCED INTERNET TECHNOLOGY

(Revised Course 2002) (510127)Time : 3 Hours] [Max. Marks : 100

Instructions to the candidates:1) Answer any 3 questions from Section-I and 3 questions from Section-II.2) Answers to the two sections must be written on separate answer books.3) Neat diagrams must be drawn wherever necessary.4) Figures to the right indicate full marks.5) Assume suitable data, if necessary.

SECTION - I

Q1) a) What is the difference between Trojan Hoarse and Spy? What are themechanisms to control Trojan Hoarse and Spy? [8]

b) Give block diagram of X.800 security model and explain the functionof each block in detail. [8]

Q2) a) What is the need of COMSEC and TRANSEC algorithms? How theydiffer from each other? Give the time and space complexity of both thealgorithms. [8]

b) What is the purpose of S-boxes in DES? Explain the procedure forkey generation in DES algorithm. [8]

Q3) a) How efficiency of RSA algorithm lies in the power of exponentiation?[8]

b) Prepare the document for security guidelines for the differentauthentication policies that must be taken into account by the networkadministrator. [8]

Q4) Write short notes on (Any 3): [18]

a) Multilevel Security

b) DDOS SYN Flood Attack

c) ICMP Overrun

d) Cyber Policy.

P1688

P.T.O.

2

[3765]-242 - 2 -

SECTION - II

Q5) a) Explain the 6-bit encoding in PEM. [8]

b) What are the proprieties a digital signature should have? In what ordershould the signature function and the confidentiality function be appliedto a message, and why? [8]

Q6) a) What is the difference between firewall and IDS? Explain the basicworking of firewall and IDS. [8]

b) How virtual networks can be made more secured? [8]

Q7) a) List and explain the security weaknesses in SMTP and Telnet serviceswhich are merely helpful to the hackers. Suggest a solution to secureeach one. [8]

b) What problem was Kerberos designed to address? How are the addressedby Kerberos? [8]

Q8) Write short notes on (Any 3): [18]

a) Session Key Management

b) PKI.

c) Time Stamping.

d) NTP.

1


[3765]-448M.E. (Civil) (Hyd. Engg.)

IRRIGATION & DRAINAGE


Instructions to the candidates:1) Answer any two questions from each section.2) Answers to the two sections should be written in separate books.3) Neat diagrams must be drawn wherever necessary.4) Figures to the right indicate full marks.5) All questions carry equal marks.6) Use of logarithmic tables slide rule, Mollier charts, electronic pocket


SECTION - I

Q1) a) Describe with the help of a sketch various forms of soil moisture.Which of these soil moisture is mainly available for utilization by plants?

[6+2]b) Find Field capacity of a soil from given data.

i) Water applied to the soil = 600 m3,ii) Area of land irrigated = 1100 m2,iii) Losses due to evaporation and deep percalation = 12%,iv) Dry density of the soil = 1500 kg/m3,v) Depth of root zone = 2 m,vi) Existing water content = 7%. [8]

c) Explain the terms: [3+3+3]i) Frequency of irrigation.ii) Soil moisture tension.iii) Kor watering.

Q2) a) Classify soils based on their soluble salt concentration and exchangablesodium content. State the characteristics of these soils. Briefly explainthe methods to reclaim each of these class of soils. [4+4+4]

P1710

P.T.O.

2

[3765]-448 - 2 -

b) What is soil errosion? List the factors responsible for soil errosion.How can we estimate soil errosion for its conservation planning? Statedifferent ways to control the soil errosion. [2+3+4+4]

Q3) a) Draw a schematic sketch of drip irrigation system labelling all basicparts. State design considerations of all parts of the system. [4+8]

b) What are the advantages of drip irrigation system as compared tosprinkler irrigation system. [6]

c) Write a short note on consumptive use and its estimation. [7]

SECTION - II

Q4) a) (i) Draw a typical sketch of a Lift irrigation scheme indicating variouscomponents in it. [5]

(ii) Specify design considerations for the following components ofLift Irrigation scheme : Jack Well, Rising Well. [6]

b) Discuss the causes and effects of waterlogging of irrigated land. Whatare the remedial measures to be undertaken to avoid waterlogging ofirrigated lands. [8]

c) Discuss the points you will consider while selecting the location ofintake well of Lift irrigation scheme? Specify the design criteria forIntake Well and Jack Well pumps. [6]

Q5) a) (i) Derive an expression for spacing of a closed Irrigation Drains.[5]

(ii) Determine the location of closed tile drain below ground level forthe following data:

Root Zone Depth = 1.5 m.

Capillary rise in soil = 0.3 m.

Coefficient of permeability of Soil = 1.5 × 10–4 m/s.

Drainage capacity = 0.11 cumecs/km2.

Spacing of Drains = 200 m.

Depth of Impervious floor below ground = 10.0 m. [6]b) What are the objectives of Command Area Development? How are

these achieved through Command Area Development programmes.[8]

c) Discuss Flexibility and Sensitivity as a parameter describing behaviourof canal outlets. Derive the expression for the Flexibility and Sensitivity.

[6]

3

Q6) a) Discuss Sprinkler Irrigation System as a water conservation measure.[5]

b) Draw a typical sketch explaining various components of SprinklerIrrigation System. [5]

c) Design a Sprinkler Irrigation System for a field having '4' 'ha' area,with 100 percent cropping intensity in Karif and Rabi and 50 percentin Summer with 2 ha area each for Sorghum and Pearl millet crop inKharif, '2' ha each for Wheat and Sunflower in Rabi and '2' 'ha' ofgroundnut in Summer. The peak water use rate was 5 mm/day forKharif, while 4 mm/day and 7 mm/day for Rabi and Summerrespectively. Soil type is Sandy loam having water holding capacityof 190 mm/m and basic infiltration rate of 12 mm/hr. The effectiveroot zone depth is 50 cm and the management allowable deficit is 50percent. Source of water is a well in one corner of the field havingelectric supply availiability for 12 hr a day for 6 days a week. Assume(i) Field irrigation efficiency of 80 percent.(ii) Medium capacity heavy-duty sprinkler having twin nozzle of

5.0 × 2.5 mm size and of 0.44 lit/Sec with 12m × 12m spacing,11 mm/hr application rate. (Assume any other data required,suitably). [15]

[3765]-448 - 3 -

1


[3765]-487M.E. (Mechanical - Heat Power)

INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINES - FUELS


Instructions to the candidates:1) Answer any 3 questions from each section.2) Answers to the two sections should be written in separate books.3) Neat diagrams must be drawn wherever necessary.4) Figures to the right indicate full marks.5) Use of logarithmic tables slide rule, Mollier charts, electronic pocket


SECTION - I

Q1) a) Explain in detail how an S.I. engine is rated. What do you mean byON 90? [8]

b) Petrol cannot be used in diesel engines and diesel cannot be used inPetrol engines, why? Explain. [10]

Q2) a) List the additives used for petrol to improve the antiknock propertiesand explain how it helps in achieving this. [8]

b) List the various liquid and gaseous fuels that can be used in petrol anddiesel engines. What are their required qualities? [8]

Q3) a) What precautions are to be taken when hydrogen is to used as a fuel inengines? Explain. [8]

b) Explain how biodiesel is produced from oils. What are its advantages?[8]

Q4) a) Write in brief the developments taken in S.I. combustion chambers.(Draw sketches). [8]

b) Explain the phenomenon of detonation in S.I. engines. What are factorsthat control it? [8]

P1719

P.T.O.

2

[3765]-487 - 2 -

Q5) Write notes on: [18]

a) HUCR

b) Aviation Turbine Fuel.

c) Stages of Combustion in S.I. engines.

SECTION - II

Q6) a) Explain the various types combustion chambers used for C.I. engines(with sketches). [8]

b) List the factors affecting delay period in C.I.engines. Explain. [8]

Q7) a) Differentiate between supercharging and turbocharging (with sketch).[8]

b) Explain the various methods of generating Swirl in C.I. enginecombustion chambers. [8]

Q8) a) What are the limits of super charging for S.I. and C.I.engines? Explain.[8]

b) List the various methods of turbocharging. Explain pulse (Buchi)method of turbo charging. What are its merits and demerits? [8]

Q9) a) What are the various circuits in a modern carburettor? Explain withneat sketch. [8]

b) With sketch explain the mixture requirements of a petrol driven vehicle.[8]

Q10)Write notes on: [18]

a) CRDI for diesel engines.

b) Mixture requirement for C.I. engines.

c) Multi port fuel injection (MPFI) system.

1


[3765]-488M.E. (Mechanical) (Heat Power)

CRYOGENIC ENGINEERING

(2008 Course) (502111) (Elective - III) (Sem. - II)Time : 3 Hours] [Max. Marks : 100

Instructions to the candidates:1) Answer 3 questions from each section.2) Answers to the two sections should be written in separate books.3) Neat diagrams must be drawn wherever necessary.4) Figures to the right indicate full marks.5) Use of logarithmic tables, Mollier charts, electronic pocket calculator is

allowed.6) Assume suitable data, if necessary.

SECTION - I

Q1) a) Explain the working of Gifford McMahon Cryorefrigerator with neatdiagram. [8]

b) Explain in detail, what is meant by J-T effect and Inversion Curve.[8]

Q2) Draw a schematic diagram of Claude Cycle. Explain its operation usingT-s diagram. Develop expressions for yield, work and efficiency. What isthe condition of smallest work requirement per unit mass liquefied? [16]

Q3) a) Develop an expression for work requirement per unit mass for an idealliquefaction system. [8]

b) Determine the ideal work requirement for the liquefaction of nitrogenbeginning at 1 atm. and 300 K. The properties of nitrogen are as follows -

Properties of Nitrogen

Pressure (atm) Temperature Enthalpy Entropy(K) (J/g) (J/g.K)

1.00 300 462 4.42

1.00 Sat. Liquid 29 0.42[8]

P1720

P.T.O.

2

[3765]-488 - 2 -

Q4) Write short notes on (any Three): [18]

a) Collins Heat Exchanger.

b) Magnetic Cooling.

c) Thermal properties of solids at cryogenic temperatures.

d) Regenerators used in Cryogenic systems.

SECTION - II

Q5) a) Define high performance and low performance Cryogenic storagevessels. Explain with neat sketch the basic storage vessel. Briefly explainthe inner and outer vessel design procedure. [8]

b) Write notes on (any two): [8]i) Cryogenic valves.ii) Cryogenic fluid transfer lines.iii) Multilayer insulation.

Q6) Discuss in details the different types of instruments used for measurementof - [16]

a) Strain

b) Liquid level

c) Flow

d) Temperatures in Cryogenic Environment.

Q7) Explain in detail any two of the following - [16]

a) Vapour shielded vessels.

b) Cryogenic compressors and expanders.

c) Diffusion Pumps.

Q8) Write notes on (any three): [18]

a) Superconducting devices.

b) Cryogenics in space technology.

c) Cryogenic applications in Medicine.

d) Dilution Refrigerator.

1


[3765]-489M.E. (Mechanical) (Heat Power)

NON-CONVENTIONAL POWER PLANTS


Instructions to the candidates:1) Answer any 3 questions from each section.2) Answers to the two sections should be written in separate books.3) Neat diagrams must be drawn wherever necessary.4) Figures to the right indicate full marks.5) Use of logarithmic tables slide rule, Mollier charts, electronic pocket


SECTION - I

Q1) a) What is the potential of renewable energy sources in India? Which isthe most commonly used sources? [8]

b) What do you understand by CO2 reduction potential of renewableenergy? Explain. [8]

Q2) a) List various ways by which solar energy can be used to generate power.With sketch explain the working of any one type. [8]

b) What are the advantages and disadvantages of Photovoltaic solar energyconversion? [8]

Q3) a) Write down the steps to be followed in the design of a photovoltaicsystem. Explain. [10]

b) List the various thermal energy storage methods and explain each oneof them. [8]

Q4) a) With neat sketch explain horizontal axis and vertical axis with machines.Write down the problems in operating large wind power generators.[8]

b) A horizontal shaft propeller type wind turbine is located in area havingfollowing wind characteristics. Speed of wind = 10 m/s at 1 atm. and15oC. Calculate [8]i) Air density

P1721

P.T.O.

2

[3765]-489 - 2 -

ii) Total power density in wind stream, W/m2

iii) Maximum possible obtainable power density, W/m2.iv) Actual obtainable power density, W/m2.v) Total power from a wind turbine of 60 m diameter.vi) Torque and axial thrust on the wind turbine operating at 40 rpm

and at maximum efficiency of 42%.

Q5) Write notes on:

a) Distributed power supply strategy. [4]

b) Energy wheeling and banking. [4]c) Economic analysis of a solar thermal system. [8]

SECTION - II

Q6) a) List the various sources for production of biogas. Explain how toaccelerate gas generation. [8]

b) With the help of a neat sketch explain the working of a Hydrogen-Oxygen fuel cell. Write the advantages and disadvantages of fuel cells.[8]

Q7) a) What are the main components of tidal power plants? Explain withsketch working of a double basin operation. [8]

b) What are the advantages and disadvantages of Geothermal energy overother energy forms. [8]

Q8) a) Explain financing mechanisms for non-conventional power plants.[8]

b) Potential of wind, tidal and biogas energy in India. [8]

Q9) a) Explain the working of a closed cycle OTEC power plant with a neatsketch. [8]

b) Write in brief the environmental impacts of conventional power plants.[8]

Q10)Write notes on: [18]

a) Clean Development Mechanisms (CDM).

b) Flash steam Geothermal power plant.

1


[3765]-505M.E. (Mechanical - Design Engineering)

COMPUTER AIDED ENGINEERING

(2008 Course) (502211) (Elective - III)Time : 3 Hours] [Max. Marks : 100

Instructions to the candidates:1) Answer any 3 questions from each section.2) Answers to the two sections should be written in separate answer books.3) Neat diagrams must be drawn wherever necessary.4) Figures to the right indicate full marks.5) Assume suitable data, if necessary.6) Use of pocket non programmable electronic calculator is allowed.

SECTION - I

Q1) a) Explain modeling and simulation as a design procedure. [8]

b) Enlist data exchange issue related to analysis and simulation. [8]

Q2) a) Enlist different features available in commercial modeling software'sand explain any one in detail. [8]

b) Explain procedure for modeling and simulation of assembly. [8]

Q3) a) Discuss advantages of feature based modeling over traditional solidmodeling techniques. [8]

b) Discuss the set of issues that need to be addressed during developmentof conceptual model for simulation. [8]

Q4) a) Explain briefly different types of material model available in FEAsoftware's. [8]

b) Explain stress tensor, deviotric stress tensor and their invariant in contestto von-misses stress. [8]


a) Topology optimization in FEA Software.

b) Assembly modeling approaches.

c) Analytical techniques for structural systems.

P1730

P.T.O.

2

[3765]-505 - 2 -

SECTION - IIQ6) a) What is mesh refinement? Explain mesh refinement methods with

suitable example. [8]

b) Enlist different types of elements used in FEA and explain how todecide element type. [8]

Q7) a) Explain some of the meshing rules to be followed during meshing.[8]

b) Classify 3D meshing techniques of FEA and explain any one in detail.[8]

Q8) a) Explain general procedure for non linear static analysis. [8]

b) Difference between dynamic and static analysis. [8]

Q9) a) Explain finite volume method used in CFD and how it is differentfrom FEM. [8]

b) Explain different types of grids used in CFD. [8]

Q10)Write short notes on: [18]

a) Basic fluid motions in CFD.

b) Methods to improve quality of poor elements in FEA.

c) Types of analysis carried out in CAE.

1


[3765]-507M.E. (Mech.) (Design)

INDUSTRIAL TRIBOLOGY

(2008 Course) (Elective - IV)Time : 3 Hours] [Max. Marks : 100

Instructions to the candidates:1) Answer any 3 questions from Section-I and 3 questions from Section-II.2) Answers to the two sections should be written in separate books.3) Neat diagrams must be drawn wherever necessary.4) Use of electronic pocket calculator is allowed.5) Assume suitable data, if necessary.

SECTION - I

Q1) a) Derive the expression for coefficient of friction using theory proposedby Bowden and Tabor and compare it with expression obtained bymodified adhesion theory. [10]

b) Discuss characteristics of frictional vibration. [6]

Q2) a) State and discuss various factors affecting wear. [8]

b) Show that the total wear volume in abrasive wear is dependent onnormal load and hardness of material using the relationship for abrasivewear equation. [8]

Q3) What is a short bearing? Write down the basic equation for pressuredistribution in case of a short bearing and deduce the load rating equation

in the form ( ) ( )[ ] 21222

222

3

16114

L.U.∈+∈−Π

∈−∈

⎥⎦

⎤⎢⎣

⎡=c

W η.

Where W – total load, U – shaft surface speed,

η – viscosity, c – radial clearance,

L – bearing length (total axial) and

∈ – eccentricity ratio. [16]

P1733

P.T.O.

2

[3765]-507 - 2 -

Q4) State all the assumptions and drive the full - Reynolds equation. [16]

Q5) Write notes on: [18]

a) Bearing materials.

b) Electrical analogy method for journal bearings.

c) Stick-slip vibration resulting from frictional relaxation - its causes andremedies.

SECTION - II

Q6) Using modified Reynold's equation for elasto-hydrodynamic lubricationderive Ertel-Grubin equation. State the limitations of this equation. [16]

Q7) a) Explain Gas lubricated bearings and state advantages and disadvantagesof gas bearings. [8]

b) Why gas lubricated bearings are called aerodynamic or self actingbearings? [8]

Q8) a) Distinguish between Squeez film lubrication and hydrodynamiclubrication. Give their practical applications. [8]

b) A rectangular plate having length to width ratio of 0.25 is approachingtowards a fixed plane with an initial oil-film thickness between theplate and plane as 0.05 mm. Load supported by plate is 12 kN for 4seconds. The viscosity of oil is 35 cP.Calculate :- [8]i) Length and width for final oil-film thickness as 0.01 mm.ii) Maximum pressure value.

Q9) Explain tribological aspects in case of:- [18]

a) Metal rolling.

b) Drawing operation.

c) Extrusion.

1


[3765]-674M.E. (Chemical)

MATHEMATICAL METHODS IN CHEMICALENGG.

(2008 Course) (Theory)Time : 3 Hours] [Max. Marks : 100


SECTION - I

Q1) a) Use the Gauss Seidal method to obtain the solution of following systemof eqns. Solve for two iterations. If true value of variables is x1 = 3,x2 = -2.5 and x3 = 7. Determine % error in the answers determined byGauss Seidal method.

3x1 - 0.1x2 - 0.2x3 = 7.85

0.1x1 + 7x2 - 0.3x3 = -19.3

0.3x1 - 0.2x2 + 10x3 = 71.4 [12]

b) Use the multiple eqn Newton-Raphson method to determine roots offollowing eqns. Note that correct pair of roots is x = 2 and y = 3. Initiatecomputations with guesses of x = 1.5 and y = 3.5.

x2 + xy - 10 = 0

y + 3xy2 - 57 = 0 [6]

Q2) Solve following system of non homogenous differential eqns by using eigenvalues and eigen vectors. Where I1 and I2 are zero at t = 0.

I1' = - 4I1 + 4I2 + 12

I2' = - 1.6I1 + 1.2I2 + 4.8 [16]

P1783

P.T.O.

2

[3765]-674 - 2 -

Q3) Determine the type and stability of the critical point. [16]

a)22

11

2yy

yy

=′

=′b)

212

211

25

2

yyy

yyy

−=′

+=′

c)212

211

2

2

yyy

yyy

+=′

+=′d)

212

211

69

6

yyy

yyy

−−=′

−−=′

Q4) a) Determine eigen values and eigen vectors of the following matrix.

⎥⎦

⎤⎢⎣

⎡−

−=

02.002.002.002.0

A [4]

b) What various five types of critical points dependent on the geometricalshape of trajectories near them. Explain each in brief. [6]

c) Write short note on qualitative methods used for nonlinear systems.[3]

d) Determine eigen values of the foll. matrix. ⎥⎦

⎤⎢⎣

⎡−

−=

3113

A . [3]

SECTION - II

Q5) a) Use Liebmann method and laplacian difference eqn to solve for temp.distribution of the heated plate shown in following figure. Employoverrelaxation with a value of 1.5 for weighing factor. Do it for twoiterations.

100oC

(1, 3) (2, 3) (3, 3)

75oC (1, 2) (2, 2) (3, 2) 50oC

(1, 1) (2, 1) (3, 1)

0oC [12]

b) Write short note on derivative boundry conditions and fixed boundryconditions. [4]

. . .

. . .

. . .

3

Q6) a) Use the explicit method to solve for temp. distribution of a long, thinrod with length of 10 cm and foll. values

.1.0andcm2,/49.0 stxCcmscalk o =Δ=Δ=′ At t = 0 the temp of the

rod is zero and boundry conditions fixed for all times at T(0) = 100 oCand T(10) = 50 oC. Note that rod is of aluminium withC = 0.2174 Cal/g oC and ρ = 2.7 g/cm3.

Therefore k = 0.49 / 2.7 × 0.2174 = 0.835 cm2/s and

λ = (0.835 × 0.1) / (2)2 = 0.020875.

Do it for 3 iterations. [12]

b) What are various properties of tensor? [4]

Q7) Derive one dimensional finite element eqn by method of weighed residualsand by using Poisson's eqn given below

)(2

2xf

dxTd −=

[16]

Q8) a) Write short note on singular perturbation and regular perturbation.[4]

b) Differentiate betn (i) implicit method (ii) explicit method and CrankNicolson method. [6]

c) Differentiate betn finite difference and finite element method. [4]

d) Give classification of linear, second order partial differential equationin two variables with suitable examples. [4]

[3765]-674 - 3 -

1


[3765]-713M.E. CSE (IT)

INTERNET ROUTING DESIGN(2008 Course) (Elective - IV)


Instructions to the candidates:1) Answer any 3 questions from each section.2) Answers to the two sections should be written in separate answer books.3) Neat diagrams must be drawn wherever necessary.4) Assume suitable data, if necessary.

SECTION - I

Q1) a) What are the functions of Routing Protocols? List out the Routingprotocols and explain their execution places in Protocol layeringarchitecture with the help of labeled diagram. [8]

b) Explain Router architecture in terms of functional view with the helpof labeled diagram. [8]

Q2) a) List out the difference between: [8]i) The Bellman-Ford and distance vector algorithm.ii) The Shortest path routing and widest path routing algorithms.

b) Consider the network topology in Figure 1. Assume now that thelinks have the following bandwidth: 1-2:1, 1-4:1, 2-3:2, 2-4:2, 3-4:1,3-5:1, 3-6: 4-5:2, 4-6:3, 5-6:2. Determine the widest paths from node6 to all the other nodes. [8]

Q3) a) List three differences between a distance vector protocol and a linkstate protocol. How is split horizon with poisoned reverse differentfrom split horizon? [9]

P1796

P.T.O.

Figure 1 : A 5-node example

2

[3765]-713 - 2 -

b) Implement a distance vector protocol using socket programming wherethe different "nodes" may be identified using port numbers. For thisimplementation project, define your own protocol format and the fieldsit must constitute. [9]

Q4) a) Explain the Interconnection of ISPs of different tiers: a representativeview. How session flows in the typical architecture, explain with welllabeled diagram? [8]

b) What are the basic functions of a router? Discuss the strengths andweaknesses of various router architectures. [8]

SECTION - II

Q5) a) What are the main differences between classful addressing scheme andCIDR? What is the maximum time allowed for a lookup in a router tosustain a data rate of Gbps with an average packet size of 100 bytes?Assume that the router requires 5 ns per packet for other operations inthe packet. [8]

b) Define The packet classification problem. A router performs a routelookup followed by classification. If the route lookup operation takes15 nanosec, how much time is available for packet classification tosustain a data rate of 40 Gbps with an average packet size of 100bytes? [8]

Q6) a) How is QoS routing different from best-effort routing? Explainconstrained shortest path routing and its variations when you considerdifferent attributes. [8]

b) How does bandwidth guarantee required by services affect theperformance it receives in a heterogeneous bandwidth environment?[8]

Q7) a) Discuss where and how MPLS-based IP/MPLS traffic engineering isdifferent from "pure" IP traffic engineering. [8]

b) Describe the IP-PSTN-IP call routing scenario, along with the differentprotocol messaging involved in call routing setup. [8]

Q8) Write short notes on: any three. [18]a) Network Management Architecture.b) Policy based Routing.c) Routing Protocols for QoS Routing.d) VPN Traffic Engineering.

1


[3765]-733M.E. (Environmental Engineering)

WATER QUALITY MODELING










SECTION - I

Q1) a) Explain various steps involved in model building. [6]

b) State and explain curve number hydrology in water quality modeling.[6]

c) Write the sources of water pollution. [6]

Q2) State and explain low frequency analysis by PPCC test. [16]

Q3) a) Explain point and non point source with suitable example. [8]

b) What are the limitations of mathematical model, explain with example.[8]

Q4) a) Discuss Hierarchy of water resource scheme (WRS) model. [8]

b) What is model validation? [8]

P1807

P.T.O.

2

[3765]-733 - 2 -

SECTION - II

Q5) Formulate a mathematical model for transport of a constituent resultingfrom the flow of the water in which the constituent is dissolved or suspended.

[18]

Q6) Assuming that second order kinetics apply (rc = -Kc2), compute the requiredvolume of complete - mix reactor to the volume of a plug-flow reactor toachieve a 90 percent reduction in concentration (Co = 1, Ce = 0.1). [16]

Q7) A small community water supply agency furnishes water to 147 customersfrom a well supply. Water records are kept showing the amount of waterpumped to the system. The agency recently installed meters for all customersand total water sales records are also kept. The following data were obtained:

Month Production gal/mo Sales, gal/mo

May 1414100 1033600

June 1421000 1104300

July 1407600 1086300

Total 4242700 3224200

Average, gal/d 46116 35046

From the water supply data, determine the amount of water consumed (gal/capita.d) and the amount of water that is unaccounted system loss (as apercent of production). The average household size as determined by thelocal planning agency is 2.43 persons per service. [16]

Q8) Explain modeling treatment process kinetics for [16]

a) Ideal plug - Flow reactor with reaction.

b) Nonideal plug flow reactor.

Documents

Me 1